summaryrefslogtreecommitdiff
path: root/2124-h
diff options
context:
space:
mode:
authorRoger Frank <rfrank@pglaf.org>2025-10-15 05:18:26 -0700
committerRoger Frank <rfrank@pglaf.org>2025-10-15 05:18:26 -0700
commitd572537f632f70e1c9cbb16d967832a9192798b2 (patch)
tree1159ce78e75388a65b581d5b20d11b42935eb0e9 /2124-h
initial commit of ebook 2124HEADmain
Diffstat (limited to '2124-h')
-rw-r--r--2124-h/2124-h.htm7169
-rw-r--r--2124-h/images/cover.jpgbin0 -> 339258 bytes
-rw-r--r--2124-h/images/fig01.jpgbin0 -> 691491 bytes
3 files changed, 7169 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/2124-h/2124-h.htm b/2124-h/2124-h.htm
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ef2e01b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/2124-h/2124-h.htm
@@ -0,0 +1,7169 @@
+<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Strict//EN"
+"http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-strict.dtd">
+<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xml:lang="en" lang="en">
+<head>
+<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html;charset=utf-8" />
+<meta http-equiv="Content-Style-Type" content="text/css" />
+<title>The Project Gutenberg eBook of A Record of Buddhistic Kingdoms, by Fâ-Hien</title>
+<link rel="coverpage" href="images/cover.jpg" />
+<style type="text/css" xml:space="preserve">
+
+body { margin-left: 20%;
+ margin-right: 20%;
+ text-align: justify; }
+
+h1, h2, h3, h4, h5 {text-align: center; font-style: normal; font-weight:
+normal; line-height: 1.5; margin-top: .5em; margin-bottom: .5em;}
+
+h1 {font-size: 300%;
+ margin-top: 0.6em;
+ margin-bottom: 0.6em;
+ letter-spacing: 0.12em;
+ word-spacing: 0.2em;
+ text-indent: 0em;}
+h2 {font-size: 150%; margin-top: 2em; margin-bottom: 1em;}
+h3 {font-size: 130%; margin-top: 1em;}
+h4 {font-size: 120%;}
+h5 {font-size: 110%;}
+
+div.chapter {page-break-before: always; margin-top: 4em;}
+
+hr {width: 80%; margin-top: 2em; margin-bottom: 2em;}
+
+p {text-indent: 1em;
+ margin-top: 0.25em;
+ margin-bottom: 0.25em; }
+
+p.poem {text-indent: 0%;
+ margin-left: 10%;
+ font-size: 90%;
+ margin-top: 1em;
+ margin-bottom: 1em; }
+
+p.letter {text-indent: 0%;
+ margin-left: 10%;
+ margin-right: 10%;
+ margin-top: 1em;
+ margin-bottom: 1em; }
+
+p.noindent {text-indent: 0% }
+
+p.center {text-align: center;
+ text-indent: 0em;
+ margin-top: 1em;
+ margin-bottom: 1em; }
+
+p.right {text-align: right;
+ margin-right: 10%;
+ margin-top: 1em;
+ margin-bottom: 1em; }
+
+p.footnote {font-size: 90%;
+ text-indent: 0%;
+ margin-left: 10%;
+ margin-right: 10%;
+ margin-top: 1em;
+ margin-bottom: 1em; }
+
+sup { vertical-align: top; font-size: 0.6em; }
+
+div.fig { display:block;
+ margin:0 auto;
+ text-align:center;
+ margin-top: 1em;
+ margin-bottom: 1em;}
+
+p.caption {font-weight: bold;
+ text-align: center; }
+
+a:link {color:blue; text-decoration:none}
+a:visited {color:blue; text-decoration:none}
+a:hover {color:red}
+
+</style>
+</head>
+<body>
+
+<div style='text-align:center; font-size:1.2em; font-weight:bold;'>The Project Gutenberg eBook of A Record of Buddhistic Kingdoms, by Fâ-Hien</div>
+<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and
+most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions
+whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms
+of the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online
+at <a href="https://www.gutenberg.org">www.gutenberg.org</a>. If you
+are not located in the United States, you will have to check the laws of the
+country where you are located before using this eBook.
+</div>
+<div style='display:block; margin-top:1em; margin-bottom:1em; margin-left:2em; text-indent:-2em'>Title: A Record of Buddhistic Kingdoms</div>
+<div style='display:block; margin-top:1em; margin-bottom:1em; margin-left:2em; text-indent:-2em'>Author: Fâ-Hien</div>
+<div style='display:block;margin:1em 0'>Release Date: March, 2000 [eBook #2124]<br />
+[Most recently updated: February 18, 2021]</div>
+<div style='display:block;margin:1em 0'>Language: English</div>
+<div style='display:block;margin:1em 0'>Character set encoding: UTF-8</div>
+<div style='display:block; margin-left:2em; text-indent:-2em'>Produced by: John Bickers; Dagny and David Widger</div>
+<div style='margin-top:2em;margin-bottom:4em'>*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK A RECORD OF BUDDHISTIC KINGDOMS ***</div>
+
+<div class="fig" style="width:75%;">
+<img src="images/cover.jpg" style="width:100%;" alt="[Illustration]" />
+</div>
+
+<h1>A Record of Buddhistic Kingdoms</h1>
+
+<h3>Being an Account by the Chinese Monk Fâ-Hien<br />
+of his Travels in India and Ceylon (A.D. 399-414)<br />
+in Search of the Buddhist Books of Discipline</h3>
+
+<h4>Translated and annotated with a Corean recension of the Chinese text</h4>
+
+<h3>BY JAMES LEGGE</h3>
+
+<hr />
+
+<h2>Contents</h2>
+
+<table summary="" style="">
+
+<tr>
+<td> <a href="#pref01">PREFACE</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+<td> <a href="#pref02">INTRODUCTION</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+<td> <a href="#chap00"><b>THE TRAVELS OF FÂ-HIEN</b></a><br /><br /></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+<td> <a href="#chap01">CHAPTER I.</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+<td> <a href="#chap02">CHAPTER II.</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+<td> <a href="#chap03">CHAPTER III.</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+<td> <a href="#chap04">CHAPTER IV.</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+<td> <a href="#chap05">CHAPTER V.</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+<td> <a href="#chap06">CHAPTER VI.</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+<td> <a href="#chap07">CHAPTER VII.</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+<td> <a href="#chap08">CHAPTER VIII.</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+<td> <a href="#chap09">CHAPTER IX.</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+<td> <a href="#chap10">CHAPTER X.</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+<td> <a href="#chap11">CHAPTER XI.</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+<td> <a href="#chap12">CHAPTER XII.</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+<td> <a href="#chap13">CHAPTER XIII.</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+<td> <a href="#chap14">CHAPTER XIV.</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+<td> <a href="#chap15">CHAPTER XV.</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+<td> <a href="#chap16">CHAPTER XVI.</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+<td> <a href="#chap17">CHAPTER XVII.</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+<td> <a href="#chap18">CHAPTER XVIII.</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+<td> <a href="#chap19">CHAPTER XIX.</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+<td> <a href="#chap20">CHAPTER XX.</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+<td> <a href="#chap21">CHAPTER XXI.</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+<td> <a href="#chap22">CHAPTER XXII.</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+<td> <a href="#chap23">CHAPTER XXIII.</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+<td> <a href="#chap24">CHAPTER XXIV.</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+<td> <a href="#chap25">CHAPTER XXV.</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+<td> <a href="#chap26">CHAPTER XXVI.</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+<td> <a href="#chap27">CHAPTER XXVII.</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+<td> <a href="#chap28">CHAPTER XXVIII.</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+<td> <a href="#chap29">CHAPTER XXIX.</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+<td> <a href="#chap30">CHAPTER XXX.</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+<td> <a href="#chap31">CHAPTER XXXI.</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+<td> <a href="#chap32">CHAPTER XXXII.</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+<td> <a href="#chap33">CHAPTER XXXIII.</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+<td> <a href="#chap34">CHAPTER XXXIV.</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+<td> <a href="#chap35">CHAPTER XXXV.</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+<td> <a href="#chap36">CHAPTER XXXVI.</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+<td> <a href="#chap37">CHAPTER XXXVII.</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+<td> <a href="#chap38">CHAPTER XXXVIII.</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+<td> <a href="#chap39">CHAPTER XXXIX.</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+<td> <a href="#chap40">CHAPTER XL.</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+</table>
+
+<div class="chapter">
+
+<h2><a name="pref01"></a>PREFACE</h2>
+
+<p>
+Several times during my long residence in Hong Kong I endeavoured to read
+through the &ldquo;Narrative of Fâ-Hien;&rdquo; but though interested with the
+graphic details of much of the work, its columns bristled so
+constantly&mdash;now with his phonetic representations of Sanskrit words, and
+now with his substitution for them of their meanings in Chinese characters, and
+I was, moreover, so much occupied with my own special labours on the Confucian
+Classics, that my success was far from satisfactory. When Dr. Eitel&rsquo;s
+&ldquo;Handbook for the Student of Chinese Buddhism&rdquo; appeared in 1870,
+the difficulty occasioned by the Sanskrit words and names was removed, but the
+other difficulty remained; and I was not able to look into the book again for
+several years. Nor had I much inducement to do so in the two copies of it which
+I had been able to procure, on poor paper, and printed from blocks badly cut at
+first, and so worn with use as to yield books the reverse of attractive in
+their appearance to the student.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+In the meantime I kept studying the subject of Buddhism from various sources;
+and in 1878 began to lecture, here in Oxford, on the Travels with my Davis
+Chinese scholar, who was at the same time Boden Sanskrit scholar. As we went
+on, I wrote out a translation in English for my own satisfaction of nearly half
+the narrative. In the beginning of last year I made Fâ-Hien again the subject
+of lecture, wrote out a second translation, independent of the former, and
+pushed on till I had completed the whole.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+The want of a good and clear text had been supplied by my friend, Mr. Bunyiu
+Nanjio, who sent to me from Japan a copy, the text of which is appended to the
+translation and notes, and of the nature of which some account is given in the
+Introduction, and towards the end of this Preface.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+The present work consists of three parts: the Translation of Fâ-Hien&rsquo;s
+Narrative of his Travels; copious Notes; and the Chinese Text of my copy from
+Japan.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+It is for the Translation that I hold myself more especially responsible.
+Portions of it were written out three times, and the whole of it twice. While
+preparing my own version I made frequent reference to previous
+translations:&mdash;those of M. Abel Rémusat, &ldquo;Revu, complété, et
+augmenté d&rsquo;éclaircissements nouveaux par MM. Klaproth et Landress&rdquo;
+(Paris, 1836); of the Rev. Samuel Beal (London, 1869), and his revision of it,
+prefixed to his &ldquo;Buddhist Records of the Western World&rdquo;
+(Trübner&rsquo;s Oriental Series, 1884); and of Mr. Herbert A. Giles, of
+H.M.&rsquo;s Consular Service in China (1877). To these I have to add a series
+of articles on &ldquo;Fa-hsien and his English Translators,&rdquo; by Mr. T.
+Watters, British Consul at Î-Chang (China Review, 1879, 1880). Those articles
+are of the highest value, displaying accuracy of Chinese scholarship and an
+extensive knowledge of Buddhism. I have regretted that Mr. Watters, while
+reviewing others, did not himself write out and publish a version of the whole
+of Fâ-Hien&rsquo;s narrative. If he had done so, I should probably have
+thought that, on the whole, nothing more remained to be done for the
+distinguished Chinese pilgrim in the way of translation. Mr. Watters had to
+judge of the comparative merits of the versions of Beal and Giles, and
+pronounce on the many points of contention between them. I have endeavoured to
+eschew those matters, and have seldom made remarks of a critical nature in
+defence of renderings of my own.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+The Chinese narrative runs on without any break. It was Klaproth who divided
+Rémusat&rsquo;s translation into forty chapters. The division is helpful to the
+reader, and I have followed it excepting in three or four instances. In the
+reprinted Chinese text the chapters are separated by a circle in the column.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+In transliterating the names of Chinese characters I have generally followed
+the spelling of Morrison rather than the Pekinese, which is now in vogue. We
+cannot tell exactly what the pronunciation of them was, about fifteen hundred
+years ago, in the time of Fâ-Hien; but the southern mandarin must be a shade
+nearer to it than that of Peking at the present day. In transliterating the
+Indian names I have for the most part followed Dr. Eitel, with such
+modification as seemed good and in harmony with growing usage.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+For the Notes I can do little more than claim the merit of selection and
+condensation. My first object in them was to explain what in the text required
+explanation to an English reader. All Chinese texts, and Buddhist texts
+especially, are new to foreign students. One has to do for them what many
+hundreds of the ablest scholars in Europe have done for the Greek and Latin
+Classics during several hundred years, and what the thousands of critics and
+commentators have been doing of our Sacred Scriptures for nearly eighteen
+centuries. There are few predecessors in the field of Chinese literature into
+whose labours translators of the present century can enter. This will be
+received, I hope, as a sufficient apology for the minuteness and length of some
+of the notes. A second object in them was to teach myself first, and then
+others, something of the history and doctrines of Buddhism. I have thought that
+they might be learned better in connexion with a lively narrative like that of
+Fâ-Hien than by reading didactic descriptions and argumentative books. Such
+has been my own experience. The books which I have consulted for these notes
+have been many, besides Chinese works. My principal help has been the full and
+masterly handbook of Eitel, mentioned already, and often referred to as E.H.
+Spence Hardy&rsquo;s &ldquo;Eastern Monachism&rdquo; (E.M.) and &ldquo;Manual
+of Buddhism&rdquo; (M.B.) have been constantly in hand, as well as Rhys
+Davids&rsquo; Buddhism, published by the Society for Promoting Christian
+Knowledge, his Hibbert Lectures, and his Buddhist Suttas in the Sacred Books of
+the East, and other writings. I need not mention other authorities, having
+endeavoured always to specify them where I make use of them. My proximity and
+access to the Bodleian Library and the Indian Institute have been of great
+advantage.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+I may be allowed to say that, so far as my own study of it has gone, I think
+there are many things in the vast field of Buddhist literature which still
+require to be carefully handled. How far, for instance, are we entitled to
+regard the present Sûtras as genuine and sufficiently accurate copies of those
+which were accepted by the Councils before our Christian era? Can anything be
+done to trace the rise of the legends and marvels of Sâkyamuni&rsquo;s history,
+which were current so early (as it seems to us) as the time of Fâ-Hien, and
+which startle us so frequently by similarities between them and narratives in
+our Gospels? Dr. Hermann Oldenberg, certainly a great authority on Buddhistic
+subjects, says that &ldquo;a biography of Buddha has not come down to us from
+ancient times, from the age of the Pâli texts; and, we can safely say, no such
+biography existed then&rdquo; (&ldquo;Buddha&mdash;His Life, His Doctrine, His
+Order,&rdquo; as translated by Hoey, p. 78). He has also (in the same work, pp.
+99, 416, 417) come to the conclusion that the hitherto unchallenged tradition
+that the Buddha was &ldquo;a king&rsquo;s son&rdquo; must be given up. The name
+&ldquo;king&rsquo;s son&rdquo; (in Chinese {...}), always used of the Buddha,
+certainly requires to be understood in the highest sense. I am content myself
+to wait for further information on these and other points, as the result of
+prolonged and careful research.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+Dr. Rhys Davids has kindly read the proofs of the Translation and Notes, and I
+most certainly thank him for doing so, for his many valuable corrections in the
+Notes, and for other suggestions which I have received from him. I may not
+always think on various points exactly as he does, but I am not more forward
+than he is to say with Horace,&mdash;
+</p>
+
+<p class="poem">
+&ldquo;Nullius addictus jurare in verba magistri.&rdquo;
+</p>
+
+<p>
+I have referred above, and also in the Introduction, to the Corean text of
+Fâ-Hien&rsquo;s narrative, which I received from Mr. Nanjio. It is on the
+whole so much superior to the better-known texts, that I determined to attempt
+to reproduce it at the end of the little volume, so far as our resources here
+in Oxford would permit. To do so has not been an easy task. The two fonts of
+Chinese types in the Clarendon Press were prepared primarily for printing the
+translation of our Sacred Scriptures, and then extended so as to be available
+for printing also the Confucian Classics; but the Buddhist work necessarily
+requires many types not found in them, while many other characters in the
+Corean recension are peculiar in their forms, and some are what Chinese
+dictionaries denominate &ldquo;vulgar.&rdquo; That we have succeeded so well as
+we have done is owing chiefly to the intelligence, ingenuity, and untiring
+attention of Mr. J. C. Pembrey, the Oriental Reader.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+The pictures that have been introduced were taken from a superb edition of a
+History of Buddha, republished recently at Hang-châu in Cheh-kiang, and
+profusely illustrated in the best style of Chinese art. I am indebted for the
+use of it to the Rev. J. H. Sedgwick, University Chinese Scholar.
+</p>
+
+<p class="right">
+JAMES LEGGE.
+</p>
+
+<p class="letter">
+Oxford:<br />
+June, 1886.
+</p>
+
+<div class="fig" style="width:100%;">
+<a href="images/fig01.jpg">
+<img src="images/fig01.jpg" width="510" height="600" alt="Illustration:" /></a>
+<p class="caption">Sketch Map Of Fâ-Hien&rsquo;s Travels</p>
+</div>
+
+<p>
+The accompanying Sketch-Map, taken in connexion with the notes on the different
+places in the Narrative, will give the reader a sufficiently accurate knowledge
+of Fâ-Hien&rsquo;s route.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+There is no difficulty in laying it down after he crossed the Indus from east
+to west into the Punjâb, all the principal places, at which he touched or
+rested, having been determined by Cunningham and other Indian geographers and
+archaeologists. Most of the places from Ch&rsquo;ang-an to Bannu have also been
+identified. Woo-e has been put down as near Kutcha, or Kuldja, in 43°
+25&#x2032; N., 81° 15&#x2032; E. The country of K&rsquo;ieh-ch&rsquo;a was
+probably Ladak, but I am inclined to think that the place where the traveller
+crossed the Indus and entered it must have been further east than Skardo. A
+doubt is intimated on page 24 as to the identification of T&rsquo;o-leih with
+Darada, but Greenough&rsquo;s &ldquo;Physical and Geological Sketch-Map of
+British India&rdquo; shows &ldquo;Dardu Proper,&rdquo; all lying on the east of
+the Indus, exactly in the position where the Narrative would lead us to place
+it. The point at which Fâ-Hien recrossed the Indus into Udyâna on the west of
+it is unknown. Takshasila, which he visited, was no doubt on the west of the
+river, and has been incorrectly accepted as the Taxila of Arrian in the Punjâb.
+It should be written Takshasira, of which the Chinese phonetisation will
+allow;&mdash;see a note of Beal in his &ldquo;Buddhist Records of the Western
+World,&rdquo; i. 138.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+We must suppose that Fâ-Hien went on from Nan-king to Ch&rsquo;ang-an, but the
+Narrative does not record the fact of his doing so.
+</p>
+
+</div><!--end chapter-->
+
+<div class="chapter">
+
+<h2><a name="pref02"></a>INTRODUCTION</h2>
+
+<p>
+Life of Fâ-Hien; Genuineness and Integrity of the Text of his Narrative;
+Number of the Adherents of Buddhism.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+1. Nothing of great importance is known about Fâ-Hien in addition to what may
+be gathered from his own record of his travels. I have read the accounts of him
+in the &ldquo;Memoirs of Eminent Monks,&rdquo; compiled in A.D. 519, and a
+later work, the &ldquo;Memoirs of Marvellous Monks,&rdquo; by the third emperor
+of the Ming dynasty (A.D. 1403-1424), which, however, is nearly all borrowed
+from the other; and all in them that has an appearance of verisimilitude can be
+brought within brief compass.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+His surname, they tell us, was Kung, and he was a native of Wû-yang in
+P&rsquo;ing-Yang, which is still the name of a large department in Shan-hsi. He
+had three brothers older than himself; but when they all died before shedding
+their first teeth, his father devoted him to the service of the Buddhist
+society, and had him entered as a Sramanera, still keeping him at home in the
+family. The little fellow fell dangerously ill, and the father sent him to the
+monastery, where he soon got well and refused to return to his parents.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+When he was ten years old, his father died; and an uncle, considering the
+widowed solitariness and helplessness of the mother, urged him to renounce the
+monastic life, and return to her, but the boy replied, &ldquo;I did not quit
+the family in compliance with my father&rsquo;s wishes, but because I wished to
+be far from the dust and vulgar ways of life. This is why I chose
+monkhood.&rdquo; The uncle approved of his words and gave over urging him. When
+his mother also died, it appeared how great had been the affection for her of
+his fine nature; but after her burial he returned to the monastery.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+On one occasion he was cutting rice with a score or two of his
+fellow-disciples, when some hungry thieves came upon them to take away their
+grain by force. The other Sramaneras all fled, but our young hero stood his
+ground, and said to the thieves, &ldquo;If you must have the grain, take what
+you please. But, Sirs, it was your former neglect of charity which brought you
+to your present state of destitution; and now, again, you wish to rob others. I
+am afraid that in the coming ages you will have still greater poverty and
+distress;&mdash;I am sorry for you beforehand.&rdquo; With these words he
+followed his companions into the monastery, while the thieves left the grain
+and went away, all the monks, of whom there were several hundred, doing homage
+to his conduct and courage.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+When he had finished his noviciate and taken on him the obligations of the full
+Buddhist orders, his earnest courage, clear intelligence, and strict regulation
+of his demeanour were conspicuous; and soon after, he undertook his journey to
+India in search of complete copies of the Vinaya-pitaka. What follows this is
+merely an account of his travels in India and return to China by sea, condensed
+from his own narrative, with the addition of some marvellous incidents that
+happened to him, on his visit to the Vulture Peak near Rajagriha.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+It is said in the end that after his return to China, he went to the capital
+(evidently Nanking), and there, along with the Indian Sramana Buddha-bhadra,
+executed translations of some of the works which he had obtained in India; and
+that before he had done all that he wished to do in this way, he removed to
+King-chow (in the present Hoo-pih), and died in the monastery of Sin, at the
+age of eighty-eight, to the great sorrow of all who knew him. It is added that
+there is another larger work giving an account of his travels in various
+countries.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+Such is all the information given about our author, beyond what he himself has
+told us. Fâ-Hien was his clerical name, and means &ldquo;Illustrious in the
+Law,&rdquo; or &ldquo;Illustrious master of the Law.&rdquo; The Shih which
+often precedes it is an abbreviation of the name of Buddha as Sâkyamuni,
+&ldquo;the Sakya, mighty in Love, dwelling in Seclusion and Silence,&rdquo; and
+may be taken as equivalent to Buddhist. It is sometimes said to have belonged
+to &ldquo;the eastern Tsin dynasty&rdquo; (A.D. 317-419), and sometimes to
+&ldquo;the Sung,&rdquo; that is, the Sung dynasty of the House of Liu (A.D.
+420-478). If he became a full monk at the age of twenty, and went to India when
+he was twenty-five, his long life may have been divided pretty equally between
+the two dynasties.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+2. If there were ever another and larger account of Fâ-Hien&rsquo;s travels
+than the narrative of which a translation is now given, it has long ceased to
+be in existence.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+In the Catalogue of the imperial library of the Suy dynasty (A.D. 589-618), the
+name Fâ-Hien occurs four times. Towards the end of the last section of it
+(page 22), after a reference to his travels, his labours in translation at
+Kin-ling (another name for Nanking), in conjunction with Buddha-bhadra, are
+described. In the second section, page 15, we find &ldquo;A Record of
+Buddhistic Kingdoms;&rdquo;&mdash;with a note, saying that it was the work of
+the &ldquo;Sramana, Fâ-Hien;&rdquo; and again, on page 13, we have
+&ldquo;Narrative of Fâ-Hien in two Books,&rdquo; and &ldquo;Narrative of
+Fâ-Hien&rsquo;s Travels in one Book.&rdquo; But all these three entries may
+possibly belong to different copies of the same work, the first and the other
+two being in separate subdivisions of the Catalogue.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+In the two Chinese copies of the narrative in my possession the title is
+&ldquo;Record of Buddhistic Kingdoms.&rdquo; In the Japanese or Corean
+recension subjoined to this translation, the title is twofold; first,
+&ldquo;Narrative of the Distinguished Monk, Fâ-Hien;&rdquo; and then, more at
+large, &ldquo;Incidents of Travels in India, by the Sramana of the Eastern
+Tsin, Fâ-Hien, recorded by himself.&rdquo;
+</p>
+
+<p>
+There is still earlier attestation of the existence of our little work than the
+Suy Catalogue. The Catalogue Raisonné of the imperial library of the present
+dynasty (chap. 71) mentions two quotations from it by Le Tao-yuen, a
+geographical writer of the dynasty of the Northern Wei (A.D. 386-584), one of
+them containing 89 characters, and the other 276; both of them given as from
+the &ldquo;Narrative of Fâ-Hien.&rdquo;
+</p>
+
+<p>
+In all catalogues subsequent to that of Suy our work appears. The evidence for
+its authenticity and genuineness is all that could be required. It is clear to
+myself that the &ldquo;Record of Buddhistic Kingdoms&rdquo; and the
+&ldquo;Narrative of his Travels by Fâ-Hien&rdquo; were designations of one and
+the same work, and that it is doubtful whether any larger work on the same
+subject was ever current. With regard to the text subjoined to my translation,
+it was published in Japan in 1779. The editor had before him four recensions of
+the narrative; those of the Sung and Ming dynasties, with appendixes on the
+names of certain characters in them; that of Japan; and that of Corea. He
+wisely adopted the Corean text, published in accordance with a royal rescript
+in 1726, so far as I can make out; but the different readings of the other
+texts are all given in top-notes, instead of foot-notes as with us, this being
+one of the points in which customs in the east and west go by contraries. Very
+occasionally, the editor indicates by a single character, equivalent to
+&ldquo;right&rdquo; or &ldquo;wrong,&rdquo; which reading in his opinion is to
+be preferred. In the notes to the present republication of the Corean text, S
+stands for Sung, M for Ming, and J for Japanese; R for right, and W for wrong.
+I have taken the trouble to give all the various readings (amounting to more
+than 300), partly as a curiosity and to make my text complete, and partly to
+show how, in the transcription of writings in whatever language, such
+variations are sure to occur,
+</p>
+
+<p class="poem">
+&ldquo;maculae, quas aut incuria fudit,<br />
+Aut humana parum cavit nature,&rdquo;
+</p>
+
+<p class="noindent">
+while on the whole they very slightly affect the meaning of the document.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+The editors of the Catalogue Raisonné intimate their doubts of the good taste
+and reliability of all Fâ-Hien&rsquo;s statements. It offends them that he
+should call central India the &ldquo;Middle Kingdom,&rdquo; and China, which to
+them was the true and only Middle Kingdom, but &ldquo;a Border
+land;&rdquo;&mdash;it offends them as the vaunting language of a Buddhist
+writer, whereas the reader will see in the expressions only an instance of what
+Fâ-Hien calls his &ldquo;simple straightforwardness.&rdquo;
+</p>
+
+<p>
+As an instance of his unreliability they refer to his account of the Buddhism
+of Khoten, whereas it is well known, they say, that the Khoteners from ancient
+times till now have been Mohammedans;&mdash;as if they could have been so 170
+years before Mohammed was born, and 222 years before the year of the Hegira!
+And this is criticism in China. The Catalogue was ordered by the
+K&rsquo;ien-lung emperor in 1722. Between three and four hundred of the
+&ldquo;Great Scholars&rdquo; of the empire were engaged on it in various
+departments, and thus egregiously ignorant did they show themselves of all
+beyond the limits of their own country, and even of the literature of that
+country itself.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+Much of what Fâ-Hien tells his readers of Buddhist miracles and legends is
+indeed unreliable and grotesque; but we have from him the truth as to what he
+saw and heard.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+3. In concluding this introduction I wish to call attention to some estimates
+of the number of Buddhists in the world which have become current, believing,
+as I do, that the smallest of them is much above what is correct.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+i. In a note on the first page of his work on the Bhilsa Topes (1854), General
+Cunningham says: &ldquo;The Christians number about 270 millions; the Buddhists
+about 222 millions, who are distributed as follows:&mdash;China 170 millions,
+Japan 25, Anam 14, Siam 3, Ava 8, Nepal 1, and Ceylon 1; total, 222
+millions.&rdquo;
+</p>
+
+<p>
+ii. In his article on M. J. Barthelemy Saint Hilaire&rsquo;s &ldquo;Le Bouddha
+et sa Religion,&rdquo; republished in his &ldquo;Chips from a German
+Workshop,&rdquo; vol. i. (1868), Professor Max Muller (p. 215) says, &ldquo;The
+young prince became the founder of a religion which, after more than two
+thousand years, is still professed by 455 millions of human beings,&rdquo; and
+he appends the following note: &ldquo;Though truth is not settled by
+majorities, it would be interesting to know which religion counts at the
+present moment the largest numbers of believers. Berghaus, in his
+&lsquo;Physical Atlas,&rsquo; gives the following division of the human race
+according to religion:&mdash;&lsquo;Buddhists 31.2 per cent, Christians 30.7,
+Mohammedans 15.7, Brahmanists 13.4, Heathens 8.7, and Jews 0.3.&rsquo; As
+Berghaus does not distinguish the Buddhists in China from the followers of
+Confucius and Laotse, the first place on the scale really belongs to
+Christianity. It is difficult to say to what religion a man belongs, as the
+same person may profess two or three. The emperor himself, after sacrificing
+according to the ritual of Confucius, visits a Tao-sse temple, and afterwards
+bows before an image of Fo in a Buddhist chapel. (&lsquo;Mélanges Asiatiques de
+St. Pétersbourg,&rsquo; vol. ii. p. 374.)&rdquo;
+</p>
+
+<p>
+iii. Both these estimates are exceeded by Dr. T. W. Rhys Davids (intimating
+also the uncertainty of the statements, and that numbers are no evidence of
+truth) in the introduction to his &ldquo;Manual of Buddhism.&rdquo; The
+Buddhists there appear as amounting in all to 500 millions:&mdash;30 millions
+of Southern Buddhists, in Ceylon, Burma, Siam, Anam, and India (Jains); and 470
+millions of North Buddhists, of whom nearly 33 millions are assigned to Japan,
+and 414,686,974 to the eighteen provinces of China proper. According to him,
+Christians amount to about 26 per cent of mankind, Hindus to about 13,
+Mohammedans to about 12 1<i>2, Buddhists to about 40, and Jews to about 1</i>2.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+In regard to all these estimates, it will be observed that the immense numbers
+assigned to Buddhism are made out by the multitude of Chinese with which it is
+credited. Subtract Cunningham&rsquo;s 170 millions of Chinese from his total of
+222, and there remains only 52 millions of Buddhists. Subtract Davids&rsquo;
+(say) 414 1<i>2 millions of Chinese from his total of 500, and there remain
+only 85 1</i>2 millions for Buddhism. Of the numbers assigned to other
+countries, as well as of their whole populations, I am in considerable doubt,
+excepting in the cases of Ceylon and India; but the greatness of the estimates
+turns upon the immense multitudes said to be in China. I do not know what total
+population Cunningham allowed for that country, nor on what principal he
+allotted 170 millions of it to Buddhism;&mdash;perhaps he halved his estimate
+of the whole, whereas Berghaus and Davids allotted to it the highest estimates
+that have been given of the people.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+But we have no certain information of the population of China. At an interview
+with the former Chinese ambassador, Kwo Sung-tao, in Paris, in 1878, I begged
+him to write out for me the amount, with the authority for it, and he assured
+me that it could not be done. I have read probably almost everything that has
+been published on the subject, and endeavoured by methods of my own to arrive
+at a satisfactory conclusion;&mdash;without reaching a result which I can
+venture to lay before the public. My impression has been that 400 millions is
+hardly an exaggeration.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+But supposing that we had reliable returns of the whole population, how shall
+we proceed to apportion that among Confucianists, Taoists, and Buddhists?
+Confucianism is the orthodoxy of China. The common name for it is Ju Chiao,
+&ldquo;the Doctrines held by the Learned Class,&rdquo; entrance into the circle
+of which is, with a few insignificant exceptions, open to all the people. The
+mass of them and the masses under their influence are preponderatingly
+Confucian; and in the observance of ancestral worship, the most remarkable
+feature of the religion proper of China from the earliest times, of which
+Confucius was not the author but the prophet, an overwhelming majority are
+regular and assiduous.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+Among &ldquo;the strange principles&rdquo; which the emperor of the
+K&rsquo;ang-hsi period, in one of his famous Sixteen Precepts, exhorted his
+people to &ldquo;discountenance and put away, in order to exalt the correct
+doctrine,&rdquo; Buddhism and Taoism were both included. If, as stated in the
+note quoted from Professor Muller, the emperor countenances both the Taoist
+worship and the Buddhist, he does so for reasons of state;&mdash;to please
+especially his Buddhist subjects in Thibet and Mongolia, and not to offend the
+many whose superstitious fancies incline to Taoism.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+When I went out and in as a missionary among the Chinese people for about
+thirty years, it sometimes occurred to me that only the inmates of their
+monasteries and the recluses of both systems should be enumerated as Buddhists
+and Taoists; but I was in the end constrained to widen that judgment, and to
+admit a considerable following of both among the people, who have neither
+received the tonsure nor assumed the yellow top. Dr. Eitel, in concluding his
+discussion of this point in his &ldquo;Lecture on Buddhism, an Event in
+History,&rdquo; says: &ldquo;It is not too much to say that most Chinese are
+theoretically Confucianists, but emotionally Buddhists or Taoists. But fairness
+requires us to add that, though the mass of the people are more or less
+influenced by Buddhist doctrines, yet the people, as a whole, have no respect
+for the Buddhist church, and habitually sneer at Buddhist priests.&rdquo; For
+the &ldquo;most&rdquo; in the former of these two sentences I would substitute
+&ldquo;nearly all;&rdquo; and between my friend&rsquo;s &ldquo;but&rdquo; and
+&ldquo;emotionally&rdquo; I would introduce &ldquo;many are,&rdquo; and would
+not care to contest his conclusion farther. It does seem to me preposterous to
+credit Buddhism with the whole of the vast population of China, the great
+majority of whom are Confucianists. My own opinion is, that its adherents are
+not so many as those even of Mohammedanism, and that instead of being the most
+numerous of the religions (so called) of the world, it is only entitled to
+occupy the fifth place, ranking below Christianity, Confucianism, Brahmanism,
+and Mohammedanism, and followed, some distance off, by Taoism. To make a table
+of percentages of mankind, and assign to each system its proportion, is to seem
+to be wise where we are deplorably ignorant; and, moreover, if our means of
+information were much better than they are, our figures would merely show the
+outward adherence. A fractional per-centage might tell more for one system than
+a very large integral one for another.
+</p>
+
+</div><!--end chapter-->
+
+<div class="chapter">
+
+<h2><a name="chap00"></a>THE TRAVELS OF FÂ-HIEN<br />
+or RECORD OF BUDDHISTIC KINGDOMS</h2>
+
+</div><!--end chapter-->
+
+<div class="chapter">
+
+<h2><a name="chap01"></a>CHAPTER I.<br />
+FROM CH&rsquo;ANG-GAN TO THE SANDY DESERT</h2>
+
+<p>
+Fâ-Hien had been living in Ch&rsquo;ang-gan.(1) Deploring the mutilated and
+imperfect state of the collection of the Books of Discipline, in the second
+year of the period Hwăng-che, being the Ke-hâe year of the cycle,(2) he entered
+into an engagement with Kwuy-king, Tâo-ching, Hwuy-ying, and Hwuy-wei,(3) that
+they should go to India and seek for the Disciplinary Rules.(4)
+</p>
+
+<p>
+After starting from Ch&rsquo;ang-gan, they passed through Lung,(5) and came to
+the kingdom of K&rsquo;een-kwei,(6) where they stopped for the summer
+retreat.(7) When that was over, they went forward to the kingdom of
+Now-t&rsquo;an,(8) crossed the mountain of Yang-low, and reached the emporium
+of Chang-yih.(9) There they found the country so much disturbed that travelling
+on the roads was impossible for them. Its king, however, was very attentive to
+them, kept them (in his capital), and acted the part of their danapati.(10)
+</p>
+
+<p>
+Here they met with Che-yen, Hwuy-keen, Sang-shao, Pao-yun, and Sang-king;(11)
+and in pleasant association with them, as bound on the same journey with
+themselves, they passed the summer retreat (of that year)(12) together,
+resuming after it their travelling, and going on to T&rsquo;un-hwang,(13) (the
+chief town) in the frontier territory of defence extending for about 80 le from
+east to west, and about 40 from north to south. Their company, increased as it
+had been, halted there for some days more than a month, after which Fâ-Hien
+and his four friends started first in the suite of an envoy,(14) having
+separated (for a time) from Pao-yun and his associates.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+Le Hao,(15) the prefect of T&rsquo;un-hwang, had supplied them with the means
+of crossing the desert (before them), in which there are many evil demons and
+hot winds. (Travellers) who encounter them perish all to a man. There is not a
+bird to be seen in the air above, nor an animal on the ground below. Though you
+look all round most earnestly to find where you can cross, you know not where
+to make your choice, the only mark and indication being the dry bones of the
+dead (left upon the sand).(16)
+</p>
+
+<p class="center">
+NOTES
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(1) Ch&rsquo;ang-gan is still the name of the principal district (and its city)
+in the department of Se-gan, Shen-se. It had been the capital of the first
+empire of Han (B.C. 202-A.D. 24), as it subsequently was that of Suy (A.D.
+589-618). The empire of the eastern Tsin, towards the close of which Fâ-Hien
+lived, had its capital at or near Nan-king, and Ch&rsquo;ang-gan was the
+capital of the principal of the three Ts&rsquo;in kingdoms, which, with many
+other minor ones, maintained a semi-independence of Tsin, their rulers
+sometimes even assuming the title of emperor.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(2) The period Hwang-che embraced from A.D. 399 to 414, being the greater
+portion of the reign of Yao Hing of the After Ts&rsquo;in, a powerful prince.
+He adopted Hwang-che for the style of his reign in 399, and the cyclical name
+of that year was Kang-tsze. It is not possible at this distance of time to
+explain, if it could be explained, how Fâ-Hien came to say that Ke-hae was the
+second year of the period. It seems most reasonable to suppose that he set out
+on his pilgrimage in A.D. 399, the cycle name of which was Ke-hae, as {.}, the
+second year, instead of {.}, the first, might easily creep into the text. In
+the &ldquo;Memoirs of Eminent Monks&rdquo; it is said that our author started
+in the third year of the period Lung-gan of the eastern Tsin, which was A.D.
+399.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(3) These, like Fâ-Hien itself, are all what we might call
+&ldquo;clerical&rdquo; names, appellations given to the parties as monks or
+sramanas.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(4) The Buddhist tripitaka or canon consists of three collections, containing,
+according to Eitel (p. 150), &ldquo;doctrinal aphorisms (or statements,
+purporting to be from Buddha himself); works on discipline; and works on
+metaphysics:&rdquo;&mdash;called sutra, vinaya, and abhidharma; in Chinese,
+king {.}, leuh {.}, and lun {.}, or texts, laws or rules, and discussions. Dr.
+Rhys Davids objects to the designation of &ldquo;metaphysics&rdquo; as used of
+the abhidharma works, saying that &ldquo;they bear much more the relation to
+&lsquo;dharma&rsquo; which &lsquo;by-law&rsquo; bears to &lsquo;law&rsquo; than
+that which &lsquo;metaphysics&rsquo; bears to &lsquo;physics&rsquo;&rdquo;
+(Hibbert Lectures, p. 49). However this be, it was about the vinaya works that
+Fâ-Hien was chiefly concerned. He wanted a good code of the rules for the
+government of &ldquo;the Order&rdquo; in all its internal and external
+relations.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(5) Lung embraced the western part of Shen-se and the eastern part of Kan-suh.
+The name remains in Lung Chow, in the extreme west of Shen-se.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(6) K&rsquo;een-kwei was the second king of &ldquo;the Western
+Ts&rsquo;in.&rdquo; His family was of northern or barbarous origin, from the
+tribe of the Seen-pe, with the surname of K&rsquo;eih-fuh. The first king was
+Kwo-kin, and received his appointment from the sovereign of the chief
+Ts&rsquo;in kingdom in 385. He was succeeded in 388 by his brother, the
+K&rsquo;een-kwei of the text, who was very prosperous in 398, and took the
+title of king of Ts&rsquo;in. Fâ-Hien would find him at his capital, somewhere
+in the present department of Lan-chow, Kan-suh.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(7) Under varshas or vashavasana (Pâli, vassa; Spence Hardy, vass), Eitel (p.
+163) says:&mdash;&ldquo;One of the most ancient institutions of Buddhist
+discipline, requiring all ecclesiastics to spend the rainy season in a
+monastery in devotional exercises. Chinese Buddhists naturally substituted the
+hot season for the rainy (from the 16th day of the 5th to the 15th of the 9th
+Chinese month).&rdquo;
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(8) During the troubled period of the Tsin dynasty, there were five (usurping)
+Leang sovereignties in the western part of the empire ({.} {.}). The name Leang
+remains in the department of Leang-chow in the northern part of Kan-suh. The
+&ldquo;southern Leang&rdquo; arose in 397 under a Tuh-fah Wu-ku, who was
+succeeded in 399 by a brother, Le-luh-koo; and he again by his brother, the
+Now-t&rsquo;an of the text, in 402, who was not yet king therefore when
+Fâ-Hien and his friends reached his capital. How he is represented as being so
+may be accounted for in various ways, of which it is not necessary to write.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(9) Chang-yih is still the name of a district in Kan-chow department, Kan-suh.
+It is a long way north and west from Lan-chow, and not far from the Great Wall.
+Its king at this time was, probably, Twan-yeh of &ldquo;the northern
+Leang.&rdquo;
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(10) Dana is the name for religious charity, the first of the six paramitas, or
+means of attaining to nirvâna; and a danapati is &ldquo;one who practises dana
+and thereby crosses {.} the sea of misery.&rdquo; It is given as &ldquo;a title
+of honour to all who support the cause of Buddhism by acts of charity,
+especially to founders and patrons of monasteries;&rdquo;&mdash;see Eitel, p.
+29.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(11) Of these pilgrims with their clerical names, the most distinguished was
+Pao-yun, who translated various Sanskrit works on his return from India, of
+which only one seems to be now existing. He died in 449. See Nanjio&rsquo;s
+Catalogue of the Tripitaka, col. 417.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(12) This was the second summer since the pilgrims left Ch&rsquo;ang-gan. We
+are now therefore, probably, in A.D. 400.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(13) T&rsquo;un-hwang (lat. 39° 40&#x2032; N.; lon. 94° 50&#x2032; E.) is still
+the name of one of the two districts constituting the department of Gan-se, the
+most western of the prefectures of Kan-suh; beyond the termination of the Great
+Wall.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(14) Who this envoy was, and where he was going, we do not know. The text will
+not admit of any other translation.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(15) Le Hao was a native of Lung-se, a man of learning, able and kindly in his
+government. He was appointed governor or prefect of T&rsquo;un-hwang by the
+king of &ldquo;the northern Leang,&rdquo; in 400; and there he sustained
+himself, becoming by and by &ldquo;duke of western Leang,&rdquo; till he died
+in 417.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(16) &ldquo;The river of sand;&rdquo; the great desert of Kobi or Gobi; having
+various other names. It was a great task which the pilgrims had now before
+them,&mdash;to cross this desert. The name of &ldquo;river&rdquo; in the
+Chinese misleads the reader, and he thinks of crossing it as of crossing a
+stream; but they had to traverse it from east to west. In his &ldquo;Vocabulary
+of Proper Names,&rdquo; p. 23, Dr. Porter Smith says:&mdash;&ldquo;It extends
+from the eastern frontier of Mongolia, south-westward to the further frontier
+of Turkestan, to within six miles of Ilchi, the chief town of Khoten. It thus
+comprises some twenty-three degrees of longitude in length, and from three to
+ten degrees of latitude in breadth, being about 2,100 miles in its greatest
+length. In some places it is arable. Some idea may be formed of the terror with
+which this &lsquo;Sea of Sand,&rsquo; with its vast billows of shifting sands,
+is regarded, from the legend that in one of the storms 360 cities were all
+buried within the space of twenty-four hours.&rdquo; So also Gilmour&rsquo;s
+&ldquo;Among the Mongols,&rdquo; chap. 5.
+</p>
+
+</div><!--end chapter-->
+
+<div class="chapter">
+
+<h2><a name="chap02"></a>CHAPTER II.<br />
+ON TO SHEN-SHEN AND THENCE TO KHOTEN</h2>
+
+<p>
+After travelling for seventeen days, a distance we may calculate of about 1500
+le, (the pilgrims) reached the kingdom of Shen-shen,(1) a country rugged and
+hilly, with a thin and barren soil. The clothes of the common people are
+coarse, and like those worn in our land of Han,(2) some wearing felt and others
+coarse serge or cloth of hair;&mdash;this was the only difference seen among
+them. The king professed (our) Law, and there might be in the country more than
+four thousand monks,(3) who were all students of the hinayana.(4) The common
+people of this and other kingdoms (in that region), as well as the sramans,(5)
+all practise the rules of India,(6) only that the latter do so more exactly,
+and the former more loosely. So (the travellers) found it in all the kingdoms
+through which they went on their way from this to the west, only that each had
+its own peculiar barbarous speech.(7) (The monks), however, who had (given up
+the worldly life) and quitted their families, were all students of Indian books
+and the Indian language. Here they stayed for about a month, and then proceeded
+on their journey, fifteen days walking to the north-west bringing them to the
+country of Woo-e.(8) In this also there were more than four thousand monks, all
+students of the hinayana. They were very strict in their rules, so that sramans
+from the territory of Ts&rsquo;in(9) were all unprepared for their regulations.
+Fâ-Hien, through the management of Foo Kung-sun, <i>maitre
+d&rsquo;hotellerie</i>,(10) was able to remain (with his company in the
+monastery where they were received) for more than two months, and here they
+were rejoined by Pao-yun and his friends.(11) (At the end of that time) the
+people of Woo-e neglected the duties of propriety and righteousness, and
+treated the strangers in so niggardly a manner that Che-yen, Hwuy-keen, and
+Hwuy-wei went back towards Kao-ch&rsquo;ang,(12) hoping to obtain there the
+means of continuing their journey. Fâ-Hien and the rest, however, through the
+liberality of Foo Kung-sun, managed to go straight forward in a south-west
+direction. They found the country uninhabited as they went along. The
+difficulties which they encountered in crossing the streams and on their route,
+and the sufferings which they endured, were unparalleled in human experience,
+but in the course of a month and five days they succeeded in reaching
+Yu-teen.(13)
+</p>
+
+<p class="center">
+NOTES
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(1) An account is given of the kingdom of Shen-shen in the 96th of the Books of
+the first Han dynasty, down to its becoming a dependency of China, about B.C.
+80. The greater portion of that is now accessible to the English reader in a
+translation by Mr. Wylie in the &ldquo;Journal of the Anthropological
+Institute,&rdquo; August, 1880. Mr. Wylie says:&mdash;&ldquo;Although we may
+not be able to identify Shen-shen with certainty, yet we have sufficient
+indications to give an appropriate idea of its position, as being south of and
+not far from lake Lob.&rdquo; He then goes into an exhibition of those
+indications, which I need not transcribe. It is sufficient for us to know that
+the capital city was not far from Lob or Lop Nor, into which in lon. 38° E. the
+Tarim flows. Fâ-Hien estimated its distance to be 1500 le from
+T&rsquo;un-hwang. He and his companions must have gone more than twenty-five
+miles a day to accomplish the journey in seventeen days.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(2) This is the name which Fâ-Hien always uses when he would speak of China,
+his native country, as a whole, calling it from the great dynasty which had
+ruled it, first and last, for between four and five centuries. Occasionally, as
+we shall immediately see, he speaks of &ldquo;the territory of Ts&rsquo;in or
+Ch&rsquo;in,&rdquo; but intending thereby only the kingdom or Ts&rsquo;in,
+having its capital, as described in the first note on the last chapter, in
+Ch&rsquo;ang-gan.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(3) So I prefer to translate the character {.} (sang) rather than by
+&ldquo;priests.&rdquo; Even in Christianity, beyond the priestly privilege
+which belongs to all believers, I object to the ministers of any denomination
+or church calling themselves or being called &ldquo;priests;&rdquo; and much
+more is the name inapplicable to the sramanas or bhikshus of Buddhism which
+acknowledges no God in the universe, no soul in man, and has no services of
+sacrifice or prayer in its worship. The only difficulty in the use of
+&ldquo;monks&rdquo; is caused by the members of the sect in Japan which, since
+the middle of the fifteenth century, has abolished the prohibition against
+marrying on the part of its ministers, and other prohibitions in diet and
+dress. Sang and sang-kea represent the Sanskrit sangha, constituted by at least
+four members, and empowered to hear confession, to grant absolution, to admit
+persons to holy orders, &amp;c.; secondly, the third constituent of the
+Buddhistic Trinity, a deification of the <i>communio sanctorum</i>, or the
+Buddhist order. The name is used by our author of the monks collectively or
+individually as belonging to the class, and may be considered as synonymous
+with the name sramana, which will immediately claim our attention.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(4) Meaning the &ldquo;small vehicle, or conveyance.&rdquo; There are in
+Buddhism the triyana, or &ldquo;three different means of salvation, i.e. of
+conveyance across the samsara, or sea of transmigration, to the shores of
+nirvâna. Afterwards the term was used to designate the different phases of
+development through which the Buddhist dogma passed, known as the mahayana,
+hinayana, and madhyamayana.&rdquo; &ldquo;The hinayana is the simplest vehicle
+of salvation, corresponding to the first of the three degrees of saintship.
+Characteristics of it are the preponderance of active moral asceticism, and the
+absence of speculative mysticism and quietism.&rdquo; E. H., pp. 151-2, 45, and
+117.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(5) The name for India is here the same as in the former chapter and throughout
+the book,&mdash;T&rsquo;een-chuh ({.} {.}), the chuh being pronounced,
+probably, in Fâ-Hien&rsquo;s time as tuk. How the earliest name for India,
+Shin-tuk or duk=Scinde, came to be changed into Thien-tuk, it would take too
+much space to explain. I believe it was done by the Buddhists, wishing to give
+a good auspicious name to the fatherland of their Law, and calling it
+&ldquo;the Heavenly Tuk,&rdquo; just as the Mohammedans call Arabia &ldquo;the
+Heavenly region&rdquo; ({.} {.}), and the court of China itself is called
+&ldquo;the Celestial&rdquo; ({.} {.}).
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(6) Sraman may in English take the place of Sramana (Pâli, Samana; in Chinese,
+Sha-man), the name for Buddhist monks, as those who have separated themselves
+from (left) their families, and quieted their hearts from all intrusion of
+desire and lust. &ldquo;It is employed, first, as a general name for ascetics
+of all denominations, and, secondly, as a general designation of Buddhistic
+monks.&rdquo; E. H., pp. 130, 131.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(7) Tartar or Mongolian.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(8) Woo-e has not been identified. Watters (&ldquo;China Review,&rdquo; viii.
+115) says:&mdash;&ldquo;We cannot be far wrong if we place it in Kharaschar, or
+between that and Kutscha.&rdquo; It must have been a country of considerable
+size to have so many monks in it.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(9) This means in one sense China, but Fâ-Hien, in his use of the name, was
+only thinking of the three Ts&rsquo;in states of which I have spoken in a
+previous note; perhaps only of that from the capital of which he had himself
+set out.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(10) This sentence altogether is difficult to construe, and Mr. Watters, in the
+&ldquo;China Review,&rdquo; was the first to disentangle more than one knot in
+it. I am obliged to adopt the reading of {.} {.} in the Chinese editions,
+instead of the {.} {.} in the Corean text. It seems clear that only one person
+is spoken of as assisting the travellers, and his name, as appears a few
+sentences farther on, was Foo Kung-sun. The {.} {.} which immediately follows
+the surname Foo {.}, must be taken as the name of his office, corresponding, as
+the {.} shows, to that of <i>le maitre d&rsquo;hotellerie</i> in a Roman
+Catholic abbey. I was once indebted myself to the kind help of such an officer
+at a monastery in Canton province. The Buddhistic name for him is
+uddesika=overseer. The Kung-sun that follows his surname indicates that he was
+descended from some feudal lord in the old times of the Chow dynasty. We know
+indeed of no ruling house which had the surname of Foo, but its adoption by the
+grandson of a ruler can be satisfactorily accounted for; and his posterity
+continued to call themselves Kung-sun, duke or lord&rsquo;s grandson, and so
+retain the memory of the rank of their ancestor.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(11) Whom they had left behind them at T&rsquo;un-hwang.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(12) The country of the Ouighurs, the district around the modern Turfan or
+Tangut.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(13) Yu-teen is better known as Khoten. Dr. P. Smith gives (p. 11) the
+following description of it:&mdash;&ldquo;A large district on the south-west of
+the desert of Gobi, embracing all the country south of Oksu and Yarkand, along
+the northern base of the Kwun-lun mountains, for more than 300 miles from east
+to west. The town of the same name, now called Ilchi, is in an extensive plain
+on the Khoten river, in lat. 37° N., and lon. 80° 35&#x2032; E. After the
+Tungani insurrection against Chinese rule in 1862, the Mufti Haji Habeeboolla
+was made governor of Khoten, and held the office till he was murdered by Yakoob
+Beg, who became for a time the conqueror of all Chinese Turkestan. Khoten
+produces fine linen and cotton stuffs, jade ornaments, copper, grain, and
+fruits.&rdquo; The name in Sanskrit is Kustana. (E. H., p. 60).
+</p>
+
+</div><!--end chapter-->
+
+<div class="chapter">
+
+<h2><a name="chap03"></a>CHAPTER III.<br />
+KHOTEN. PROCESSIONS OF IMAGES. THE KING&rsquo;S NEW MONASTERY.</h2>
+
+<p>
+Yu-teen is a pleasant and prosperous kingdom, with a numerous and flourishing
+population. The inhabitants all profess our Law, and join together in its
+religious music for their enjoyment.(1) The monks amount to several myriads,
+most of whom are students of the mahayana.(2) They all receive their food from
+the common store.(3) Throughout the country the houses of the people stand
+apart like (separate) stars, and each family has a small tope(4) reared in
+front of its door. The smallest of these may be twenty cubits high, or rather
+more.(5) They make (in the monasteries) rooms for monks from all quarters,(5)
+the use of which is given to travelling monks who may arrive, and who are
+provided with whatever else they require.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+The lord of the country lodged Fâ-Hien and the others comfortably, and
+supplied their wants, in a monastery(6) called Gomati,(6) of the mahayana
+school. Attached to it there are three thousand monks, who are called to their
+meals by the sound of a bell. When they enter the refectory, their demeanour is
+marked by a reverent gravity, and they take their seats in regular order, all
+maintaining a perfect silence. No sound is heard from their alms-bowls and
+other utensils. When any of these pure men(7) require food, they are not
+allowed to call out (to the attendants) for it, but only make signs with their
+hands.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+Hwuy-king, Tao-ching, and Hwuy-tah set out in advance towards the country of
+K&rsquo;eeh-ch&rsquo;a;(8) but Fâ-Hien and the others, wishing to see the
+procession of images, remained behind for three months. There are in this
+country four(9) great monasteries, not counting the smaller ones. Beginning on
+the first day of the fourth month, they sweep and water the streets inside the
+city, making a grand display in the lanes and byways. Over the city gate they
+pitch a large tent, grandly adorned in all possible ways, in which the king and
+queen, with their ladies brilliantly arrayed,(10) take up their residence (for
+the time).
+</p>
+
+<p>
+The monks of the Gomati monastery, being mahayana students, and held in great
+reverence by the king, took precedence of all others in the procession. At a
+distance of three or four le from the city, they made a four-wheeled image car,
+more than thirty cubits high, which looked like the great hall (of a monastery)
+moving along. The seven precious substances(11) were grandly displayed about
+it, with silken streamers and canopies hanging all around. The (chief)
+image(12) stood in the middle of the car, with two Bodhisattvas(13) in
+attendance upon it, while devas(14) were made to follow in waiting, all
+brilliantly carved in gold and silver, and hanging in the air. When (the car)
+was a hundred paces from the gate, the king put off his crown of state, changed
+his dress for a fresh suit, and with bare feet, carrying in his hands flowers
+and incense, and with two rows of attending followers, went out at the gate to
+meet the image; and, with his head and face (bowed to the ground), he did
+homage at its feet, and then scattered the flowers and burnt the incense. When
+the image was entering the gate, the queen and the brilliant ladies with her in
+the gallery above scattered far and wide all kinds of flowers, which floated
+about and fell promiscuously to the ground. In this way everything was done to
+promote the dignity of the occasion. The carriages of the monasteries were all
+different, and each one had its own day for the procession. (The ceremony)
+began on the first day of the fourth month, and ended on the fourteenth, after
+which the king and queen returned to the palace.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+Seven or eight le to the west of the city there is what is called the
+King&rsquo;s New Monastery, the building of which took eighty years, and
+extended over three reigns. It may be 250 cubits in height, rich in elegant
+carving and inlaid work, covered above with gold and silver, and finished
+throughout with a combination of all the precious substances. Behind the tope
+there has been built a Hall of Buddha,(15) of the utmost magnificence and
+beauty, the beams, pillars, venetianed doors, and windows being all overlaid
+with gold-leaf. Besides this, the apartments for the monks are imposingly and
+elegantly decorated, beyond the power of words to express. Of whatever things
+of highest value and preciousness the kings in the six countries on the east of
+the (Ts&rsquo;ung) range of mountains(16) are possessed, they contribute the
+greater portion (to this monastery), using but a small portion of them
+themselves.(17)
+</p>
+
+<p class="center">
+NOTES
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(1) This fondness for music among the Khoteners is mentioned by Hsuan and
+Ch&rsquo;wang and others.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(2) Mahayana. It is a later form of the Buddhist doctrine, the second phase of
+its development corresponding to the state of a Bodhisattva, who, being able to
+transport himself and all mankind to nirvâna, may be compared to a huge
+vehicle. See Davids on the &ldquo;Key-note of the &lsquo;Great
+Vehicle,&rsquo;&rdquo; Hibbert Lectures, p. 254.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(3) Fâ-Hien supplies sufficient information of how the common store or funds
+of the monasteries were provided, farther on in chapters xvi and xxxix, as well
+as in other passages. As the point is important, I will give here, from
+Davids&rsquo; fifth Hibbert Lecture (p. 178), some of the words of the dying
+Buddha, taken from &ldquo;The Book of the Great Decease,&rdquo; as illustrating
+the statement in this text:&mdash;&ldquo;So long as the brethren shall
+persevere in kindness of action, speech, and thought among the saints, both in
+public and private; so long as they shall divide without partiality, and share
+in common with the upright and holy, all such things as they receive in
+accordance with the just provisions of the order, down even to the mere
+contents of a begging bowl; . . . so long may the brethren be expected not to
+decline, but to prosper.&rdquo;
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(4) The Chinese {.} (t&rsquo;ah; in Cantonese, t&rsquo;ap), as used by
+Fâ-Hien, is, no doubt, a phonetisation of the Sanskrit stupa or Pâli thupa;
+and it is well in translating to use for the structures described by him the
+name of topes,&mdash;made familiar by Cunningham and other Indian antiquarians.
+In the thirteenth chapter there is an account of one built under the
+superintendence of Buddha himself, &ldquo;as a model for all topes in
+future.&rdquo; They were usually in the form of bell-shaped domes, and were
+solid, surmounted by a long tapering pinnacle formed with a series of rings,
+varying in number. But their form, I suppose, was often varied; just as we have
+in China pagodas of different shapes. There are several topes now in the Indian
+Institute at Oxford, brought from Buddha Gaya, but the largest of them is much
+smaller than &ldquo;the smallest&rdquo; of those of Khoten. They were intended
+chiefly to contain the relics of Buddha and famous masters of his Law; but what
+relics could there be in the Tiratna topes of chapter xvi?
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(5) The meaning here is much disputed. The author does not mean to say that the
+monk&rsquo;s apartments were made &ldquo;square,&rdquo; but that the
+monasteries were made with many guest-chambers or spare rooms.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(6) The Sanskrit term for a monastery is used here,&mdash;Sangharama,
+&ldquo;gardens of the assembly,&rdquo; originally denoting only &ldquo;the
+surrounding park, but afterwards transferred to the whole of the
+premises&rdquo; (E. H., p. 118). Gomati, the name of this monastery, means
+&ldquo;rich in cows.&rdquo;
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(7) A denomination for the monks as vimala, &ldquo;undefiled&rdquo; or
+&ldquo;pure.&rdquo; Giles makes it &ldquo;the menials that attend on the
+monks,&rdquo; but I have not met with it in that application.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(8) K&rsquo;eeh-ch&rsquo;a has not been clearly identified. Rémusat made it
+Cashmere; Klaproth, Iskardu; Beal makes it Kartchou; and Eitel, Khas&rsquo;a,
+&ldquo;an ancient tribe on the Paropamisus, the Kasioi of Ptolemy.&rdquo; I
+think it was Ladak, or some well-known place in it. Hwuy-tah, unless that name
+be an alias, appears here for the first time.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(9) Instead of &ldquo;four,&rdquo; the Chinese copies of the text have
+&ldquo;fourteen;&rdquo; but the Corean reading is, probably, more correct.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(10) There may have been, as Giles says, &ldquo;maids of honour;&rdquo; but the
+character does not say so.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(11) The Sapta-ratna, gold, silver, lapis lazuli, rock crystal, rubies,
+diamonds or emeralds, and agate. See Sacred Books of the East (Davids&rsquo;
+Buddhist Suttas), vol. xi., p. 249.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(12) No doubt that of Sâkyamuni himself.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(13) A Bodhisattva is one whose essence has become intelligence; a Being who
+will in some future birth as a man (not necessarily or usually the next) attain
+to Buddhahood. The name does not include those Buddhas who have not yet
+attained to pari-nirvâna. The symbol of the state is an elephant fording a
+river. Popularly, its abbreviated form P&rsquo;u-sa is used in China for any
+idol or image; here the name has its proper signification.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(14) {.} {.}, &ldquo;all the thien,&rdquo; or simply &ldquo;the thien&rdquo;
+taken as plural. But in Chinese the character called thien {.} denotes heaven,
+or Heaven, and is interchanged with Ti and Shang Ti, meaning God. With the
+Buddhists it denotes the devas or Brahmanic gods, or all the inhabitants of the
+six devalokas. The usage shows the antagonism between Buddhism and Brahmanism,
+and still more that between it and Confucianism.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(15) Giles and Williams call this &ldquo;the oratory of Buddha.&rdquo; But
+&ldquo;oratory&rdquo; gives the idea of a small apartment, whereas the name
+here leads the mind to think of a large &ldquo;hall.&rdquo; I once accompanied
+the monks of a large monastery from their refectory to the Hall of Buddha,
+which was a lofty and spacious apartment splendidly fitted up.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(16) The Ts&rsquo;ung, or &ldquo;Onion&rdquo; range, called also the Belurtagh
+mountains, including the Karakorum, and forming together the connecting links
+between the more northern T&rsquo;een-shan and the Kwun-lun mountains on the
+north of Thibet. It would be difficult to name the six countries which Fâ-Hien
+had in mind.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(17) This seems to be the meaning here. My first impression of it was that the
+author meant to say that the contributions which they received were spent by
+the monks mainly on the buildings, and only to a small extent for themselves;
+and I still hesitate between that view and the one in the version.<br />
+    There occurs here the binomial phrase kung-yang {.} {.}, which is one of
+the most common throughout the narrative, and is used not only of support in
+the way of substantial contributions given to monks, monasteries, and Buddhism,
+but generally of all Buddhistic worship, if I may use that term in the
+connexion. Let me here quote two or three sentences from Davids&rsquo; Manual
+(pp. 168-170):&mdash;&ldquo;The members of the order are secured from want.
+There is no place in the Buddhist scheme for churches; the offering of flowers
+before the sacred tree or image of the Buddha takes the place of worship.
+Buddhism does not acknowledge the efficacy of prayers; and in the warm
+countries where Buddhists live, the occasional reading of the law, or preaching
+of the word, in public, can take place best in the open air, by moonlight,
+under a simple roof of trees or palms. There are five principal kinds of
+meditation, which in Buddhism takes the place of prayer.&rdquo;
+</p>
+
+</div><!--end chapter-->
+
+<div class="chapter">
+
+<h2><a name="chap04"></a>CHAPTER IV.<br />
+THROUGH THE TS&rsquo;UNG OR &ldquo;ONION&rdquo; MOUNTAINS TO
+K&rsquo;EEH-CH&rsquo;A;&mdash;PROBABLY SKARDO, OR SOME CITY MORE TO THE EAST IN
+LADAK.</h2>
+
+<p>
+When the processions of images in the fourth month were over, Sang-shao, by
+himself alone, followed a Tartar who was an earnest follower of the Law,(1) and
+proceeded towards Kophene.(2) Fâ-Hien and the others went forward to the
+kingdom of Tsze-hoh, which it took them twenty-five days to reach.(3) Its king
+was a strenuous follower of our Law,(4) and had (around him) more than a
+thousand monks, mostly students of the mahayana. Here (the travellers) abode
+fifteen days, and then went south for four days, when they found themselves
+among the Ts&rsquo;ung-ling mountains, and reached the country of Yu-hwuy,(5)
+where they halted and kept their retreat.(6) When this was over, they went on
+among the hills(7) for twenty-five days, and got to K&rsquo;eeh-ch&rsquo;a,(8)
+there rejoining Hwuy-king(9) and his two companions.
+</p>
+
+<p class="center">
+NOTES
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(1) This Tartar is called a {.} {.}, &ldquo;a man of the Tao,&rdquo; or faith
+of Buddha. It occurs several times in the sequel, and denotes the man who is
+not a Buddhist outwardly only, but inwardly as well, whose faith is always
+making itself manifest in his ways. The name may be used of followers of other
+systems of faith besides Buddhism.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(2) See the account of the kingdom of Kophene, in the 96th Book of the first
+Han Records, p. 78, where its capital is said to be 12,200 le from
+Ch&rsquo;ang-gan. It was the whole or part of the present Cabulistan. The name
+of Cophene is connected with the river Kophes, supposed to be the same as the
+present Cabul river, which falls into the Indus, from the west, at Attock,
+after passing Peshawar. The city of Cabul, the capital of Afghanistan, may be
+the Kophene of the text; but we do not know that Sang-shao and his guide got so
+far west. The text only says that they set out from Khoten &ldquo;towards
+it.&rdquo;
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(3) Tsze-hoh has not been identified. Beal thinks it was Yarkand, which,
+however, was north-west from Khoten. Watters (&ldquo;China Review,&rdquo; p.
+135) rather approves the suggestion of &ldquo;Tashkurgan in Sirikul&rdquo; for
+it. As it took Fâ-Hien twenty-five days to reach it, it must have been at
+least 150 miles from Khoten.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(4) The king is described here by a Buddhistic phrase, denoting the possession
+of viryabala, &ldquo;the power of energy; persevering exertion&mdash;one of the
+five moral powers&rdquo; (E. H., p. 170).
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(5) Nor has Yu-hwuy been clearly identified. Evidently it was directly south
+from Tsze-hoh, and among the &ldquo;Onion&rdquo; mountains. Watters hazards the
+conjecture that it was the Aktasch of our present maps.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(6) This was the retreat already twice mentioned as kept by the pilgrims in the
+summer, the different phraseology, &ldquo;quiet rest,&rdquo; without any
+mention of the season, indicating their approach to India, E. H., p. 168. Two,
+if not three, years had elapsed since they left Ch&rsquo;ang-gan. Are we now
+with them in 402?
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(7) This is the Corean reading {.}, much preferable to the {.} of the Chinese
+editions.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(8) Watters approves of Klaproth&rsquo;s determination of
+K&rsquo;eeh-ch&rsquo;a to be Iskardu or Skardo. There are difficulties in
+connexion with the view, but it has the advantage, to my mind very great, of
+bringing the pilgrims across the Indus. The passage might be accomplished with
+ease at this point of the river&rsquo;s course, and therefore is not
+particularly mentioned.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(9) Who had preceded them from Khoten.
+</p>
+
+</div><!--end chapter-->
+
+<div class="chapter">
+
+<h2><a name="chap05"></a>CHAPTER V.<br />
+GREAT QUINQUENNIAL ASSEMBLY OF MONKS. RELICS OF BUDDHA. PRODUCTIONS OF THE
+COUNTRY.</h2>
+
+<p>
+It happened that the king of the country was then holding the pancha parishad,
+that is, in Chinese, the great quinquennial assembly.(1) When this is to be
+held, the king requests the presence of the Sramans from all quarters (of his
+kingdom). They come (as if) in clouds; and when they are all assembled, their
+place of session is grandly decorated. Silken streamers and canopies are hung
+out in, and water-lilies in gold and silver are made and fixed up behind the
+places where (the chief of them) are to sit. When clean mats have been spread,
+and they are all seated, the king and his ministers present their offerings
+according to rule and law. (The assembly takes place), in the first, second, or
+third month, for the most part in the spring.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+After the king has held the assembly, he further exhorts the ministers to make
+other and special offerings. The doing of this extends over one, two, three,
+five, or even seven days; and when all is finished, he takes his own
+riding-horse, saddles, bridles, and waits on him himself,(2) while he makes the
+noblest and most important minister of the kingdom mount him. Then, taking fine
+white woollen cloth, all sorts of precious things, and articles which the
+Sramans require, he distributes them among them, uttering vows at the same time
+along with all his ministers; and when this distribution has taken place, he
+again redeems (whatever he wishes) from the monks.(3)
+</p>
+
+<p>
+The country, being among the hills and cold, does not produce the other
+cereals, and only the wheat gets ripe. After the monks have received their
+annual (portion of this), the mornings suddenly show the hoar-frost, and on
+this account the king always begs the monks to make the wheat ripen(4) before
+they receive their portion. There is in the country a spitoon which belonged to
+Buddha, made of stone, and in colour like his alms-bowl. There is also a tooth
+of Buddha, for which the people have reared a tope, connected with which there
+are more than a thousand monks and their disciples,(5) all students of the
+hinayana. To the east of these hills the dress of the common people is of
+coarse materials, as in our country of Ts&rsquo;in, but here also(6) there were
+among them the differences of fine woollen cloth and of serge or haircloth. The
+rules observed by the Sramans are remarkable, and too numerous to be mentioned
+in detail. The country is in the midst of the Onion range. As you go forward
+from these mountains, the plants, trees, and fruits are all different from
+those of the land of Han, excepting only the bamboo, pomegranate,(7) and
+sugar-cane.
+</p>
+
+<p class="center">
+NOTES
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(1) See Eitel, p. 89. He describes the assembly as &ldquo;an ecclesiastical
+conference, first instituted by king Asoka for general confession of sins and
+inculcation of morality.&rdquo;
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(2) The text of this sentence is perplexing; and all translators, including
+myself, have been puzzled by it.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(3) See what we are told of king Asoka&rsquo;s grant of all the Jambudvipa to
+the monks in chapter xxvii. There are several other instances of similar gifts
+in the Mahavansa.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(4) Watters calls attention to this as showing that the monks of
+K&rsquo;eeh-ch&rsquo;a had the credit of possessing weather-controlling powers.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(5) The text here has {.} {.}, not {.} alone. I often found in monasteries boys
+and lads who looked up to certain of the monks as their preceptors.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(6) Compare what is said in chapter ii of the dress of the people of Shen-shen.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(7) Giles thinks the fruit here was the guava, because the ordinary name for
+&ldquo;pomegranate&rdquo; is preceded by gan {.}; but the pomegranate was
+called at first Gan Shih-lau, as having been introduced into China from
+Gan-seih by Chang-k&rsquo;een, who is referred to in chapter vii.
+</p>
+
+</div><!--end chapter-->
+
+<div class="chapter">
+
+<h2><a name="chap06"></a>CHAPTER VI.<br />
+ON TOWARDS NORTH INDIA. DARADA. IMAGE OF MAITREYA BODHISATTVA.</h2>
+
+<p>
+From this (the travellers) went westwards towards North India, and after being
+on the way for a month, they succeeded in getting across and through the range
+of the Onion mountains. The snow rests on them both winter and summer. There
+are also among them venomous dragons, which, when provoked, spit forth
+poisonous winds, and cause showers of snow and storms of sand and gravel. Not
+one in ten thousand of those who encounter these dangers escapes with his life.
+The people of the country call the range by the name of &ldquo;The Snow
+mountains.&rdquo; When (the travellers) had got through them, they were in
+North India, and immediately on entering its borders, found themselves in a
+small kingdom called T&rsquo;o-leih,(1) where also there were many monks, all
+students of the hinayana.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+In this kingdom there was formerly an Arhan,(2) who by his supernatural
+power(3) took a clever artificer up to the Tushita heaven, to see the height,
+complexion, and appearance of Maitreya Bodhisattva,(4) and then return and make
+an image of him in wood. First and last, this was done three times, and then
+the image was completed, eighty cubits in height, and eight cubits at the base
+from knee to knee of the crossed legs. On fast-days it emits an effulgent
+light. The kings of the (surrounding) countries vie with one another in
+presenting offerings to it. Here it is,&mdash;to be seen now as of old.(5)
+</p>
+
+<p class="center">
+NOTES
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(1) Eitel and others identify this with Darada, the country of the ancient
+Dardae, the region near Dardus; lat. 30° 11&#x2032; N., lon. 73° 54&#x2032; E.
+See E. H. p. 30. I am myself in more than doubt on the point. Cunningham
+(&ldquo;Ancient Geography of India,&rdquo; p. 82) says &ldquo;Darel is a valley
+on the right or western bank of the Indus, now occupied by Dardus or Dards,
+from whom it received its name.&rdquo; But as I read our narrative, Fâ-Hien is
+here on the eastern bank of the Indus, and only crosses to the western bank as
+described in the next chapter.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(2) Lo-han, Arhat, Arahat, are all designations of the perfected Arya, the
+disciple who has passed the different stages of the Noble Path, or eightfold
+excellent way, who has conquered all passions, and is not to be reborn again.
+Arhatship implies possession of certain supernatural powers, and is not to be
+succeeded by Buddhaship, but implies the fact of the saint having already
+attained nirvâna. Popularly, the Chinese designate by this name the wider
+circle of Buddha&rsquo;s disciples, as well as the smaller ones of 500 and 18.
+No temple in Canton is better worth a visit than that of the 500 Lo-han.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(3) Riddhi-sakshatkriya, &ldquo;the power of supernatural
+footsteps,&ldquo;=&rdquo;a body flexible at pleasure,&rdquo; or unlimited power
+over the body. E. H., p. 104.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(4) Tushita is the fourth Devaloka, where all Bodhisattvas are reborn before
+finally appearing on earth as Buddha. Life lasts in Tushita 4000 years, but
+twenty-four hours there are equal to 400 years on earth. E. H., p. 152.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(5) Maitreya (Spence Hardy, Maitri), often styled Ajita, &ldquo;the
+Invincible,&rdquo; was a Bodhisattva, the principal one, indeed, of
+Sâkyamuni&rsquo;s retinue, but is not counted among the ordinary (historical)
+disciples, nor is anything told of his antecedents. It was in the Tushita
+heaven that Sâkyamuni met him and appointed him as his successor, to appear as
+Buddha after the lapse of 5000 years. Maitreya is therefore the expected
+Messiah of the Buddhists, residing at present in Tushita, and, according to the
+account of him in Eitel (H., p. 70), &ldquo;already controlling the propagation
+of the Buddhistic faith.&rdquo; The name means &ldquo;gentleness&rdquo; or
+&ldquo;kindness;&rdquo; and this will be the character of his dispensation.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(6) The combination of {.} {.} in the text of this concluding sentence, and so
+frequently occurring throughout the narrative, has occasioned no little dispute
+among previous translators. In the imperial thesaurus of phraseology
+(P&rsquo;ei-wan Yun-foo), under {.}, an example of it is given from
+Chwang-tsze, and a note subjoined that {.} {.} is equivalent to {.} {.},
+&ldquo;anciently and now.&rdquo;
+</p>
+
+</div><!--end chapter-->
+
+<div class="chapter">
+
+<h2><a name="chap07"></a>CHAPTER VII.<br />
+CROSSING OF THE INDUS. WHEN BUDDHISM FIRST CROSSED THE RIVER FOR THE EAST
+</h2>
+
+<p>
+The travellers went on to the south-west for fifteen days (at the foot of the
+mountains, and) following the course of their range. The way was difficult and
+rugged, (running along) a bank exceedingly precipitous, which rose up there, a
+hill-like wall of rock, 10,000 cubits from the base. When one approaches the
+edge of it, his eyes become unsteady; and if he wished to go forward in the
+same direction, there was no place on which he could place his foot; and
+beneath where the waters of the river called the Indus.(1) In former times men
+had chiselled paths along the rocks, and distributed ladders on the face of
+them, to the number altogether of 700, at the bottom of which there was a
+suspension bridge of ropes, by which the river was crossed, its banks being
+there eighty paces apart.(2) The (place and arrangements) are to be found in
+the Records of the Nine Interpreters,(3) but neither Chang K&rsquo;een(4) nor
+Kan Ying(5) had reached the spot.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+The monks(6) asked Fâ-Hien if it could be known when the Law of Buddha first
+went to the east. He replied, &ldquo;When I asked the people of those countries
+about it, they all said that it had been handed down by their fathers from of
+old that, after the setting up of the image of Maitreya Bodhisattva, there were
+Sramans of India who crossed this river, carrying with them Sûtras and Books of
+Discipline. Now the image was set up rather more than 300 years after the
+nirvâna(7) of Buddha, which may be referred to the reign of king P&rsquo;ing of
+the Chow dynasty.(8) According to this account we may say that the diffusion of
+our great doctrines (in the east) began from (the setting up of) this image. If
+it had not been through that Maitreya,(9) the great spiritual master(10) (who
+is to be) the successor of the Sakya, who could have caused the &lsquo;Three
+Precious Ones&rsquo;(11) to be proclaimed so far, and the people of those
+border lands to know our Law? We know of a truth that the opening of (the way
+for such) a mysterious propagation is not the work of man; and so the dream of
+the emperor Ming of Han(12) had its proper cause.&rdquo;
+</p>
+
+<p class="center">
+NOTES
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(1) The Sindhu. We saw in a former note that the earliest name in China for
+India was Shin-tuh. So, here, the river Indus is called by a name approaching
+that in sound.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(2) Both Beal and Watters quote from Cunningham (Ladak, pp. 88, 89) the
+following description of the course of the Indus in these parts, in striking
+accordance with our author&rsquo;s account:&mdash;&ldquo;From Skardo to Rongdo,
+and from Rongdo to Makpou-i-shang-rong, for upwards of 100 miles, the Indus
+sweeps sullen and dark through a mighty gorge in the mountains, which for wild
+sublimity is perhaps unequalled. Rongdo means the country of defiles. . . .
+Between these points the Indus raves from side to side of the gloomy chasm,
+foaming and chafing with ungovernable fury. Yet even in these inaccessible
+places has daring and ingenious man triumphed over opposing nature. The yawning
+abyss is spanned by frail rope bridges, and the narrow ledges of rocks are
+connected by ladders to form a giddy pathway overhanging the seething cauldron
+below.&rdquo;
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(3) The Japanese edition has a different reading here from the Chinese
+copies,&mdash;one which Rémusat (with true critical instinct) conjectured
+should take the place of the more difficult text with which alone he was
+acquainted. The &ldquo;Nine Interpreters&rdquo; would be a general name for the
+official interpreters attached to the invading armies of Han in their attempts
+to penetrate and subdue the regions of the west. The phrase occurs in the
+memoir of Chang K&rsquo;een, referred to in the next note.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(4) Chang K&rsquo;een, a minister of the emperor Woo of Han (B.C. 140-87), is
+celebrated as the first Chinese who &ldquo;pierced the void,&rdquo; and
+penetrated to &ldquo;the regions of the west,&rdquo; corresponding very much to
+the present Turkestan. Through him, by B.C. 115, a regular intercourse was
+established between China and the thirty-six kingdoms or states of that
+quarter;&mdash;see Mayers&rsquo; Chinese Reader&rsquo;s Manual, p. 5. The
+memoir of Chang K&rsquo;een, translated by Mr. Wylie from the Books of the
+first Han dynasty, appears in the Journal of the Anthropological Institute,
+referred to already.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(5) Less is known of Kan Ying than of Chang K&rsquo;een. Being sent in A.D. 88
+by his patron Pan Chao on an embassy to the Roman empire, he only got as far as
+the Caspian sea, and returned to China. He extended, however, the knowledge of
+his countrymen with regard to the western regions;&mdash;see the memoir of Pan
+Chao in the Books of the second Han, and Mayers&rsquo; Manual, pp. 167, 168.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(6) Where and when? Probably at his first resting-place after crossing the
+Indus.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(7) This may refer to Sâkyamuni&rsquo;s becoming Buddha on attaining to
+nirvâna, or more probably to his pari-nirvâna and death.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(8) As king P&rsquo;ing&rsquo;s reign lasted from B.C. 750 to 719, this would
+place the death of Buddha in the eleventh century B.C., whereas recent
+inquirers place it between B.C. 480 and 470, a year or two, or a few years,
+after that of Confucius, so that the two great &ldquo;Masters&rdquo; of the
+east were really contemporaries. But if Rhys Davids be correct, as I think he
+is, in fixing the date of Buddha&rsquo;s death within a few years of 412 B.C.
+(see Manual, p. 213), not to speak of Westergaard&rsquo;s still lower date,
+then the Buddha was very considerably the junior of Confucius.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(9) This confirms the words of Eitel, that Maitreya is already controlling the
+propagation of the faith.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(10) The Chinese characters for this simply mean &ldquo;the great scholar or
+officer;&rdquo; but see Eitel&rsquo;s Handbook, p. 99, on the term purusha.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(11) &ldquo;The precious Buddha,&rdquo; &ldquo;the precious Law,&rdquo; and
+&ldquo;the precious Monkhood;&rdquo; Buddha, Dharma, and Sangha; the whole
+being equivalent to Buddhism.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(12) Fâ-Hien thus endorses the view that Buddhism was introduced into China in
+this reign, A.D. 58-75. The emperor had his dream in A.D. 61.
+</p>
+
+</div><!--end chapter-->
+
+<div class="chapter">
+
+<h2><a name="chap08"></a>CHAPTER VIII.<br />
+WOO-CHANG, OR UDYANA. MONASTERIES, AND THEIR WAYS. TRACES OF BUDDHA.</h2>
+
+<p>
+After crossing the river, (the travellers) immediately came to the kingdom of
+Woo-chang,(1) which is indeed (a part) of North India. The people all use the
+language of Central India, &ldquo;Central India&rdquo; being what we should
+call the &ldquo;Middle Kingdom.&rdquo; The food and clothes of the common
+people are the same as in that Central Kingdom. The Law of Buddha is very
+(flourishing in Woo-chang). They call the places where the monks stay (for a
+time) or reside permanently Sangharamas; and of these there are in all 500, the
+monks being all students of the hinayana. When stranger bhikshus(2) arrive at
+one of them, their wants are supplied for three days, after which they are told
+to find a resting-place for themselves.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+There is a tradition that when Buddha came to North India, he came at once to
+this country, and that here he left a print of his foot, which is long or short
+according to the ideas of the beholder (on the subject). It exists, and the
+same thing is true about it, at the present day. Here also are still to be seen
+the rock on which he dried his clothes, and the place where he converted the
+wicked dragon.(3) The rock is fourteen cubits high, and more than twenty broad,
+with one side of it smooth.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+Hwuy-king, Hwuy-tah, and Tao-ching went on ahead towards (the place of)
+Buddha&rsquo;s shadow in the country of Nagara;(4) but Fâ-Hien and the others
+remained in Woo-chang, and kept the summer retreat.(5) That over, they
+descended south, and arrived in the country of Soo-ho-to.(6)
+</p>
+
+<p class="center">
+NOTES
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(1) Udyâna, meaning &ldquo;the Park;&rdquo; just north of the Punjâb, the
+country along the Subhavastu, now called the Swat; noted for its forests,
+flowers, and fruits (E. H., p. 153).
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(2) Bhikshu is the name for a monk as &ldquo;living by alms,&rdquo; a
+mendicant. All bhikshus call themselves Sramans. Sometimes the two names are
+used together by our author.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(3) Naga is the Sanskrit name for the Chinese lung or dragon; often meaning a
+snake, especially the boa. &ldquo;Chinese Buddhists,&rdquo; says Eitel, p. 79,
+&ldquo;when speaking of nagas as boa spirits, always represent them as enemies
+of mankind, but when viewing them as deities of rivers, lakes, or oceans, they
+describe them as piously inclined.&rdquo; The dragon, however, is in China the
+symbol of the Sovereign and Sage, a use of it unknown in Buddhism, according to
+which all nagas need to be converted in order to obtain a higher phase of
+being. The use of the character too {.}, as here, in the sense of &ldquo;to
+convert,&rdquo; is entirely Buddhistic. The six paramitas are the six virtues
+which carry men across {.} the great sea of life and death, as the sphere of
+transmigration to nirvâna. With regard to the particular conversion here, Eitel
+(p. 11) says the Naga&rsquo;s name was Apatala, the guardian deity of the
+Subhavastu river, and that he was converted by Sâkyamuni shortly before the
+death of the latter.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(4) In Chinese Na-k&rsquo;eeh, an ancient kingdom and city on the southern bank
+of the Cabul river, about thirty miles west of Jellalabad.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(5) We would seem now to be in 403.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(6) Soo-ho-to has not been clearly identified. Beal says that later Buddhist
+writers include it in Udyâna. It must have been between the Indus and the Swat.
+I suppose it was what we now call Swastene.
+</p>
+
+</div><!--end chapter-->
+
+<div class="chapter">
+
+<h2><a name="chap09"></a>CHAPTER IX.<br />
+SOO-HO-TO. LEGEND OF BUDDHA.</h2>
+
+<p>
+In that country also Buddhism(1) is flourishing. There is in it the place where
+Sakra,(2) Ruler of Devas, in a former age,(3) tried the Bodhisattva, by
+producing(4) a hawk (in pursuit of a) dove, when (the Bodhisattva) cut off a
+piece of his own flesh, and (with it) ransomed the dove. After Buddha had
+attained to perfect wisdom,(5) and in travelling about with his disciples
+(arrived at this spot), he informed them that this was the place where he
+ransomed the dove with a piece of his own flesh. In this way the people of the
+country became aware of the fact, and on the spot reared a tope, adorned with
+layers(6) of gold and silver plates.
+</p>
+
+<p class="center">
+NOTES
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(1) Buddhism stands for the two Chinese characters {.} {.}, &ldquo;the Law of
+Buddha,&rdquo; and to that rendering of the phrase, which is of frequent
+occurrence, I will in general adhere. Buddhism is not an adequate rendering of
+them any more than Christianity would be of {to euaggelion Xristou}. The Fa or
+Law is the equivalent of dharma comprehending all in the first Basket of the
+Buddhist teaching,&mdash;as Dr. Davids says (Hibbert Lectures, p. 44),
+&ldquo;its ethics and philosophy, and its system of self-culture;&rdquo; with
+the theory of karma, it seems to me, especially underlying it. It has been
+pointed out (Cunningham&rsquo;s &ldquo;Bhilsa Topes,&rdquo; p. 102) that dharma
+is the keystone of all king Priyadarsi or Asoka&rsquo;s edicts. The whole of
+them are dedicated to the attainment of one object, &ldquo;the advancement of
+dharma, or of the Law of Buddha.&rdquo; His native Chinese afforded no better
+character than {.} or Law, by which our author could express concisely his idea
+of the Buddhistic system, as &ldquo;a law of life,&rdquo; a directory or system
+of Rules, by which men could attain to the consummation of their being.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(2) Sakra is a common name for the Brahmanic Indra, adopted by Buddhism into
+the circle of its own great adherents;&mdash;it has been said, &ldquo;because
+of his popularity.&rdquo; He is generally styled, as here, T&rsquo;een Ti,
+&ldquo;God or Ruler of Devas.&rdquo; He is now the representative of the
+secular power, the valiant protector of the Buddhist body, but is looked upon
+as inferior to Sâkyamuni, and every Buddhist saint. He appears several times in
+Fâ-Hien&rsquo;s narrative. E. H., pp. 108 and 46.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(3) The Chinese character is {.}, &ldquo;formerly,&rdquo; and is often, as in
+the first sentence of the narrative, simply equivalent to that adverb. At other
+times it means, as here, &ldquo;in a former age,&rdquo; some pre-existent state
+in the time of a former birth. The incident related is &ldquo;a Jataka
+story.&rdquo;
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(4) It occurs at once to the translator to render the characters {.} {.} by
+&ldquo;changed himself to.&rdquo; Such is often their meaning in the sequel,
+but their use in chapter xxiv may be considered as a crucial test of the
+meaning which I have given them here.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(5) That is, had become Buddha, or completed his course {.} {.}.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(6) This seems to be the contribution of {.} (or {.}), to the force of the
+binomial {.} {.}, which is continually occurring.
+</p>
+
+</div><!--end chapter-->
+
+<div class="chapter">
+
+<h2><a name="chap10"></a>CHAPTER X.<br />
+GANDHARA. LEGENDS OF BUDDHA.</h2>
+
+<p>
+The travellers, going downwards from this towards the east, in five days came
+to the country of Gandhara,(1) the place where Dharma-vivardhana,(2) the son of
+Asoka,(3) ruled. When Buddha was a Bodhisattva, he gave his eyes also for
+another man here;(4) and at the spot they have also reared a large tope,
+adorned with layers of gold and silver plates. The people of the country were
+mostly students of the hinayana.
+</p>
+
+<p class="center">
+NOTES
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(1) Eitel says &ldquo;an ancient kingdom, corresponding to the region about
+Dheri and Banjour.&rdquo; But see note 5.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(2) Dharma-vivardhana is the name in Sanskrit, represented by the Fa Yi {.} {.}
+of the text.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(3) Asoka is here mentioned for the first time;&mdash;the Constantine of the
+Buddhist society, and famous for the number of vihâras and topes which he
+erected. He was the grandson of Chandragupta (i.q. Sandracottus), a rude
+adventurer, who at one time was a refugee in the camp of Alexander the Great;
+and within about twenty years afterwards drove the Greeks out of India, having
+defeated Seleucus, the Greek ruler of the Indus provinces. He had by that time
+made himself king of Magadha. His grandson was converted to Buddhism by the
+bold and patient demeanour of an Arhat whom he had ordered to be buried alive,
+and became a most zealous supporter of the new faith. Dr. Rhys Davids (Sacred
+Books of the East, vol. xi, p. xlvi) says that &ldquo;Asoka&rsquo;s coronation
+can be fixed with absolute certainty within a year or two either way of 267
+B.C.&rdquo;
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(4) This also is a Jataka story; but Eitel thinks it may be a myth, constructed
+from the story of the blinding of Dharma-vivardhana.
+</p>
+
+</div><!--end chapter-->
+
+<div class="chapter">
+
+<h2><a name="chap11"></a>CHAPTER XI.<br />
+TAKSHASILA. LEGENDS. THE FOUR GREAT TOPES.</h2>
+
+<p>
+Seven days&rsquo; journey from this to the east brought the travellers to the
+kingdom of Takshasila,(1) which means &ldquo;the severed head&rdquo; in the
+language of China. Here, when Buddha was a Bodhisattva, he gave away his head
+to a man;(2) and from this circumstance the kingdom got its name.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+Going on further for two days to the east, they came to the place where the
+Bodhisattva threw down his body to feed a starving tigress.(2) In these two
+places also large topes have been built, both adorned with layers of all the
+precious substances. The kings, ministers, and peoples of the kingdoms around
+vie with one another in making offerings at them. The trains of those who come
+to scatter flowers and light lamps at them never cease. The nations of those
+quarters all those (and the other two mentioned before) &ldquo;the four great
+topes.&rdquo;
+</p>
+
+<p class="center">
+NOTES
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(1) See Julien&rsquo;s &ldquo;Methode pour dechiffrer et transcrire les Nomes
+Sanscrits,&rdquo; p. 206. Eitel says, &ldquo;The Taxila of the Greeks, the
+region near Hoosun Abdaul in lat. 35° 48&#x2032; N., lon. 72° 44&#x2032;
+E.&rdquo; But this identification, I am satisfied, is wrong. Cunningham,
+indeed, takes credit (&ldquo;Ancient Geography of India,&rdquo; pp. 108, 109)
+for determining this to be the site of Arrian&rsquo;s Taxila,&mdash;in the
+upper Punjâb, still existing in the ruins of Shahdheri, between the Indus and
+Hydaspes (the modern Jhelum). So far he may be correct; but the Takshasila of
+Fâ-Hien was on the other, or western side of the Indus; and between the river
+and Gandhara. It took him, indeed, seven days travelling eastwards to reach it;
+but we do not know what stoppages he may have made on the way. We must be wary
+in reckoning distances from his specifications of days.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(2) Two Jataka stories. See the account of the latter in Spence Hardy&rsquo;s
+&ldquo;Manual of Buddhism,&rdquo; pp. 91, 92. It took place when Buddha had
+been born as a Brahman in the village of Daliddi; and from the merit of the
+act, he was next born in a devaloka.
+</p>
+
+</div><!--end chapter-->
+
+<div class="chapter">
+
+<h2><a name="chap12"></a>CHAPTER XII.<br />
+PURUSHAPURA, OR PESHAWUR. PROPHECY ABOUT KING KANISHKA AND HIS TOPE.
+BUDDHA&rsquo;S ALMS-BOWL. DEATH OF HWUY-YING.</h2>
+
+<p>
+Going southwards from Gandhara, (the travellers) in four days arrived at the
+kingdom of Purushapura.(1) Formerly, when Buddha was travelling in this country
+with his disciples, he said to Ananda,(2) &ldquo;After my pari-nirvâna,(3)
+there will be a king named Kanishka,(4) who shall on this spot build a
+tope.&rdquo; This Kanishka was afterwards born into the world; and (once), when
+he had gone forth to look about him, Sakra, Ruler of Devas, wishing to excite
+the idea in his mind, assumed the appearance of a little herd-boy, and was
+making a tope right in the way (of the king), who asked what sort of thing he
+was making. The boy said, &ldquo;I am making a tope for Buddha.&rdquo; The king
+said, &ldquo;Very good;&rdquo; and immediately, right over the boy&rsquo;s
+tope, he (proceeded to) rear another, which was more than four hundred cubits
+high, and adorned with layers of all the precious substances. Of all the topes
+and temples which (the travellers) saw in their journeyings, there was not one
+comparable to this in solemn beauty and majestic grandeur. There is a current
+saying that this is the finest tope in Jambudvipa.(5) When the king&rsquo;s
+tope was completed, the little tope (of the boy) came out from its side on the
+south, rather more than three cubits in height.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+Buddha&rsquo;s alms-bowl is in this country. Formerly, a king of Yueh-she(6)
+raised a large force and invaded this country, wishing to carry the bowl away.
+Having subdued the kingdom, as he and his captains were sincere believers in
+the Law of Buddha, and wished to carry off the bowl, they proceeded to present
+their offerings on a great scale. When they had done so to the Three Precious
+Ones, he made a large elephant be grandly caparisoned, and placed the bowl upon
+it. But the elephant knelt down on the ground, and was unable to go forward.
+Again he caused a four-wheeled waggon to be prepared in which the bowl was put
+to be conveyed away. Eight elephants were then yoked to it, and dragged it with
+their united strength; but neither were they able to go forward. The king knew
+that the time for an association between himself and the bowl had not yet
+arrived,(7) and was sad and deeply ashamed of himself. Forthwith he built a
+tope at the place and a monastery, and left a guard to watch (the bowl), making
+all sorts of contributions.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+There may be there more than seven hundred monks. When it is near midday, they
+bring out the bowl, and, along with the common people,(8) make their various
+offerings to it, after which they take their midday meal. In the evening, at
+the time of incense, they bring the bowl out again.(9) It may contain rather
+more than two pecks, and is of various colours, black predominating, with the
+seams that show its fourfold composition distinctly marked.(10) Its thickness
+is about the fifth of an inch, and it has a bright and glossy lustre. When poor
+people throw into it a few flowers, it becomes immediately full, while some
+very rich people, wishing to make offering of many flowers, might not stop till
+they had thrown in hundreds, thousands, and myriads of bushels, and yet would
+not be able to fill it.(11)
+</p>
+
+<p>
+Pao-yun and Sang-king here merely made their offerings to the alms-bowl, and
+(then resolved to) go back. Hwuy-king, Hwuy-tah, and Tao-ching had gone on
+before the rest to Negara,(12) to make their offerings at (the places of)
+Buddha&rsquo;s shadow, tooth, and the flat-bone of his skull. (There) Hwuy-king
+fell ill, and Tao-ching remained to look after him, while Hwuy-tah came alone
+to Purushapura, and saw the others, and (then) he with Pao-yun and Sang-king
+took their way back to the land of Ts&rsquo;in. Hwuy-king(13) came to his
+end(14) in the monastery of Buddha&rsquo;s alms-bowl, and on this Fâ-Hien went
+forward alone towards the place of the flat-bone of Buddha&rsquo;s skull.
+</p>
+
+<p class="center">
+NOTES
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(1) The modern Peshawur, lat. 34° 8&#x2032; N., lon. 71° 30&#x2032; E.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(2) A first cousin of Sâkyamuni, and born at the moment when he attained to
+Buddhaship. Under Buddha&rsquo;s teaching, Ananda became an Arhat, and is
+famous for his strong and accurate memory; and he played an important part at
+the first council for the formation of the Buddhist canon. The friendship
+between Sâkyamuni and Ananda was very close and tender; and it is impossible to
+read much of what the dying Buddha said to him and of him, as related in the
+Maha-pari-nirvâna Sutra, without being moved almost to tears. Ananda is to
+reappear on earth as Buddha in another Kalpa. See E. H., p. 9, and the Sacred
+Books of the East, vol. xi.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(3) On his attaining to nirvâna, Sâkyamuni became the Buddha, and had no longer
+to mourn his being within the circle of transmigration, and could rejoice in an
+absolute freedom from passion, and a perfect purity. Still he continued to live
+on for forty-five years, till he attained to pari-nirvâna, and had done with
+all the life of sense and society, and had no more exercise of thought. He
+died; but whether he absolutely and entirely <i>ceased</i> to be, in any sense
+of the word <i>being</i>, it would be difficult to say. Probably he himself
+would not and could not have spoken definitely on the point. So far as our use
+of language is concerned, apart from any assured faith in and hope of
+immortality, his pari-nirvâna was his death.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(4) Kanishka appeared, and began to reign, early in our first century, about
+A.D. 10. He was the last of three brothers, whose original seat was in
+Yueh-she, immediately mentioned, or Tukhara. Converted by the sudden appearance
+of a saint, he became a zealous Buddhist, and patronised the system as
+liberally as Asoka had done. The finest topes in the north-west of India are
+ascribed to him; he was certainly a great man and a magnificent sovereign.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(5) Jambudvipa is one of the four great continents of the universe,
+representing the inhabited world as fancied by the Buddhists, and so called
+because it resembles in shape the leaves of the jambu tree. It is south of
+mount Meru, and divided among four fabulous kings (E. H., p. 36). It is often
+used, as here perhaps, merely as the Buddhist name for India.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(6) This king was perhaps Kanishka himself, Fâ-Hien mixing up, in an
+inartistic way, different legends about him. Eitel suggests that a relic of the
+old name of the country may still exist in that of the Jats or Juts of the
+present day. A more common name for it is Tukhara, and he observes that the
+people were the Indo-Scythians of the Greeks, and the Tartars of Chinese
+writers, who, driven on by the Huns (180 B.C.), conquered Transoxiana,
+destroyed the Bactrian kingdom (126 B.C.), and finally conquered the Punjâb,
+Cashmere, and great part of India, their greatest king being Kanishak (E. H.,
+p. 152).
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(7) Watters, clearly understanding the thought of the author in this sentence,
+renders&mdash;&ldquo;his destiny did not extend to a connexion with the
+bowl;&rdquo; but the term &ldquo;destiny&rdquo; suggests a controlling or
+directing power without. The king thought that his virtue in the past was not
+yet sufficient to give him possession of the bowl.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(8) The text is simply &ldquo;those in white clothes.&rdquo; This may mean
+&ldquo;the laity,&rdquo; or the &ldquo;upasakas;&rdquo; but it is better to
+take the characters in their common Chinese acceptation, as meaning
+&ldquo;commoners,&rdquo; &ldquo;men who have no rank.&rdquo; See in
+Williams&rsquo; Dictionary under {.}.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(9) I do not wonder that Rémusat should give for this&mdash;&ldquo;et
+s&rsquo;en retournent apres.&rdquo; But Fâ-Hien&rsquo;s use of {.} in the
+sense of &ldquo;in the same way&rdquo; is uniform throughout the narrative.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(10) Hardy&rsquo;s M. B., p. 183, says:&mdash;&ldquo;The alms-bowl, given by
+Mahabrahma, having vanished (about the time that Gotama became Buddha), each of
+the four guardian deities brought him an alms-bowl of emerald, but he did not
+accept them. They then brought four bowls made of stone, of the colour of the
+mung fruit; and when each entreated that his own bowl might be accepted, Buddha
+caused them to appear as if formed into a single bowl, appearing at the upper
+rim as if placed one within the other.&rdquo; See the account more correctly
+given in the &ldquo;Buddhist Birth Stories,&rdquo; p. 110.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(11) Compare the narrative in Luke&rsquo;s Gospel, xxi. 1-4.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(12) See chapter viii.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(13) This, no doubt, should be Hwuy-ying. King was at this time ill in Nagara,
+and indeed afterwards he dies in crossing the Little Snowy Mountains; but all
+the texts make him die twice. The confounding of the two names has been pointed
+out by Chinese critics.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(14) &ldquo;Came to his end;&rdquo; i.e., according to the text, &ldquo;proved
+the impermanence and uncertainty,&rdquo; namely, of human life. See
+Williams&rsquo; Dictionary under {.}. The phraseology is wholly Buddhistic.
+</p>
+
+</div><!--end chapter-->
+
+<div class="chapter">
+
+<h2><a name="chap13"></a>CHAPTER XIII.<br />
+NAGARA. FESTIVAL OF BUDDHA&rsquo;S SKULL-BONE. OTHER RELICS, AND HIS
+SHADOW.</h2>
+
+<p>
+Going west for sixteen yojanas,(1) he came to the city He-lo(2) in the borders
+of the country of Nagara, where there is the flat-bone of Buddha&rsquo;s skull,
+deposited in a vihâra(3) adorned all over with gold-leaf and the seven sacred
+substances. The king of the country, revering and honouring the bone, and
+anxious lest it should be stolen away, has selected eight individuals,
+representing the great families in the kingdom, and committing to each a seal,
+with which he should seal (its shrine) and guard (the relic). At early dawn
+these eight men come, and after each has inspected his seal, they open the
+door. This done, they wash their hands with scented water and bring out the
+bone, which they place outside the vihâra, on a lofty platform, where it is
+supported on a round pedestal of the seven precious substances, and covered
+with a bell of <i>lapis lazuli</i>, both adorned with rows of pearls. Its
+colour is of a yellowish white, and it forms an imperfect circle twelve inches
+round,(4) curving upwards to the centre. Every day, after it has been brought
+forth, the keepers of the vihâra ascend a high gallery, where they beat great
+drums, blow conchs, and clash their copper cymbals. When the king hears them,
+he goes to the vihâra, and makes his offerings of flowers and incense. When he
+has done this, he (and his attendants) in order, one after another, (raise the
+bone), place it (for a moment) on the top of their heads,(5) and then depart,
+going out by the door on the west as they entered by that on the east. The king
+every morning makes his offerings and performs his worship, and afterwards
+gives audience on the business of his government. The chiefs of the Vaisyas(6)
+also make their offerings before they attend to their family affairs. Every day
+it is so, and there is no remissness in the observance of the custom. When all
+the offerings are over, they replace the bone in the vihâra, where there is a
+vimoksha tope,(7) of the seven precious substances, and rather more than five
+cubits high, sometimes open, sometimes shut, to contain it. In front of the
+door of the vihâra, there are parties who every morning sell flowers and
+incense,(8) and those who wish to make offerings buy some of all kinds. The
+kings of various countries are also constantly sending messengers with
+offerings. The vihâra stands in a square of thirty paces, and though heaven
+should shake and earth be rent, this place would not move.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+Going on, north from this, for a yojana, (Fâ-Hien) arrived at the capital of
+Nagara, the place where the Bodhisattva once purchased with money five stalks
+of flowers, as an offering to the Dipankara Buddha.(9) In the midst of the city
+there is also the tope of Buddha&rsquo;s tooth, where offerings are made in the
+same way as to the flat-bone of his skull.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+A yojana to the north-east of the city brought him to the mouth of a valley,
+where there is Buddha&rsquo;s pewter staff;(10) and a vihâra also has been
+built at which offerings are made. The staff is made of Gosîrsha Chandana, and
+is quite sixteen or seventeen cubits long. It is contained in a wooden tube,
+and though a hundred or a thousand men ere to (try to) lift it, they could not
+move it.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+Entering the mouth of the valley, and going west, he found Buddha&rsquo;s
+Sanghali,(11) where also there is reared a vihâra, and offerings are made. It
+is a custom of the country when there is a great drought, for the people to
+collect in crowds, bring out the robe, pay worship to it, and make offerings,
+on which there is immediately a great rain from the sky.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+South of the city, half a yojana, there is a rock-cavern, in a great hill
+fronting the south-west; and here it was that Buddha left his shadow. Looking
+at it from a distance of more than ten paces, you seem to see Buddha&rsquo;s
+real form, with his complexion of gold, and his characteristic marks(12) in
+their nicety clearly and brightly displayed. The nearer you approach, however,
+the fainter it becomes, as if it were only in your fancy. When the kings from
+the regions all around have sent skilful artists to take a copy, none of them
+have been able to do so. Among the people of the country there is a saying
+current that &ldquo;the thousand Buddhas(13) must all leave their shadows
+here.&rdquo;
+</p>
+
+<p>
+Rather more than four hundred paces west from the shadow, when Buddha was at
+the spot, he shaved his hair and clipt his nails, and proceeded, along with his
+disciples, to build a tope seventy or eighty cubits high, to be a model for all
+future topes; and it is still existing. By the side of it there is a monastery,
+with more than seven hundred monks in it. At this place there are as many as a
+thousand topes(14) of Arhans and Pratyeka Buddhas.(15)
+</p>
+
+<p class="center">
+NOTES
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(1) Now in India, Fâ-Hien used the Indian measure of distance; but it is not
+possible to determine exactly what its length then was. The estimates of it are
+very different, and vary from four and a half or five miles to seven, and
+sometimes more. See the subject exhaustively treated in Davids&rsquo;
+&ldquo;Ceylon Coins and Measures,&rdquo; pp. 15-17.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(2) The present Hidda, west of Peshawur, and five miles south of Jellalabad.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(3) &ldquo;The vihâra,&rdquo; says Hardy, &ldquo;is the residence of a recluse
+or priest;&rdquo; and so Davids:&mdash;&ldquo;the clean little hut where the
+mendicant lives.&rdquo; Our author, however, does not use the Indian name here,
+but the Chinese characters which express its meaning&mdash;tsing shay, &ldquo;a
+pure dwelling.&rdquo; He uses the term occasionally, and evidently, in this
+sense; more frequently it occurs in his narrative in connexion with the
+Buddhist relic worship; and at first I translated it by &ldquo;shrine&rdquo;
+and &ldquo;shrine-house;&rdquo; but I came to the conclusion, at last, to
+employ always the Indian name. The first time I saw a shrine-house was, I
+think, in a monastery near Foo-chow;&mdash;a small pyramidical structure, about
+ten feet high, glittering as if with the precious substances, but all, it
+seemed to me, of tinsel. It was in a large apartment of the building, having
+many images in it. The monks said it was the most precious thing in their
+possession, and that if they opened it, as I begged them to do, there would be
+a convulsion that would destroy the whole establishment. See E. H., p. 166. The
+name of the province of Behar was given to it in consequence of its many
+vihâras.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(4) According to the characters, &ldquo;square, round, four inches.&rdquo;
+Hsuan-chwang says it was twelve inches round.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(5) In Williams&rsquo; Dictionary, under {.}, the characters, used here, are
+employed in the phrase for &ldquo;to degrade an officer,&rdquo; that is,
+&ldquo;to remove the token of his rank worn on the crown of his head;&rdquo;
+but to place a thing on the crown is a Buddhistic form of religious homage.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(6) The Vaisyas, or bourgeois caste of Hindu society, are described here as
+&ldquo;resident scholars.&rdquo;
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(7) See Eitel&rsquo;s Handbook under the name vimoksha, which is explained as
+&ldquo;the act of self-liberation,&rdquo; and &ldquo;the dwelling or state of
+liberty.&rdquo; There are eight acts of liberating one&rsquo;s self from all
+subjective and objective trammels, and as many states of liberty (vimukti)
+resulting therefrom. They are eight degrees of self-inanition, and apparently
+eight stages on the way to nirvâna. The tope in the text would be emblematic in
+some way of the general idea of the mental progress conducting to the
+Buddhistic consummation of existence.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(8) This incense would be in long &ldquo;sticks,&rdquo; small and large, such
+as are sold to-day throughout China, as you enter the temples.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(9) &ldquo;The illuminating Buddha,&rdquo; the twenty-fourth predecessor of
+Sâkyamuni, and who, so long before, gave him the assurance that he would
+by-and-by be Buddha. See Jataka Tales, p. 23.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(10) The staff was, as immediately appears, of Gosîrsha Chandana, or
+&ldquo;sandal-wood from the Cow&rsquo;s-head mountain,&rdquo; a species of
+copper-brown sandal-wood, said to be produced most abundantly on a mountain of
+(the fabulous continent) Ullarakuru, north of mount Meru, which resembles in
+shape the head of a cow (E. H., pp. 42, 43). It is called a &ldquo;pewter
+staff&rdquo; from having on it a head and rings and pewter. See Watters,
+&ldquo;China Review,&rdquo; viii, pp. 227, 228, and Williams&rsquo; Dictionary,
+under {.}.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(11) Or Sanghati, the double or composite robe, part of a monk&rsquo;s attire,
+reaching from the shoulders to the knees, and fastened round the waist (E. H.,
+p. 118).
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(12) These were the &ldquo;marks and beauties&rdquo; on the person of a supreme
+Buddha. The rishi Kala Devala saw them on the body of the infant Sakya prince
+to the number of 328, those on the teeth, which had not yet come out, being
+visible to his spirit-like eyes (M. B., pp. 148, 149).
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(13) Probably=&ldquo;all Buddhas.&rdquo;
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(14) The number may appear too great. But see what is said on the size of topes
+in chapter iii, note 4.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(15) In Singhalese, Pase Buddhas; called also Nidana Buddhas, and Pratyeka
+Jinas, and explained by &ldquo;individually intelligent,&rdquo;
+&ldquo;completely intelligent,&rdquo; &ldquo;intelligent as regards the
+nidanas.&rdquo; This, says Eitel (pp. 96, 97), is &ldquo;a degree of saintship
+unknown to primitive Buddhism, denoting automats in ascetic life who attain to
+Buddhaship &lsquo;individually,&rsquo; that is, without a teacher, and without
+being able to save others. As the ideal hermit, the Pratyeka Buddha is compared
+with the rhinoceros khadga that lives lonely in the wilderness. He is also
+called Nidana Buddha, as having mastered the twelve nidanas (the twelve links
+in the everlasting chain of cause and effect in the whole range of existence,
+the understanding of which solves the riddle of life, revealing the inanity of
+all forms of existence, and preparing the mind for nirvâna). He is also
+compared to a horse, which, crossing a river, almost buries its body under the
+water, without, however, touching the bottom of the river. Thus in crossing
+samsara he &lsquo;suppresses the errors of life and thought, and the effects of
+habit and passion, without attaining to absolute perfection.&rsquo;&rdquo;
+Whether these Buddhas were unknown, as Eitel says, to primitive Buddhism, may
+be doubted. See Davids&rsquo; Hibbert Lectures, p. 146.
+</p>
+
+</div><!--end chapter-->
+
+<div class="chapter">
+
+<h2><a name="chap14"></a>CHAPTER XIV.<br />
+DEATH OF HWUY-KING IN THE LITTLE SNOWY MOUNTAINS. LO-E. POHNA. CROSSING THE
+INDUS TO THE EAST.</h2>
+
+<p>
+Having stayed there till the third month of winter, Fâ-Hien and the two
+others,(1) proceeding southwards, crossed the Little Snowy mountains.(2) On
+them the snow lies accumulated both winter and summer. On the north (side) of
+the mountains, in the shade, they suddenly encountered a cold wind which made
+them shiver and become unable to speak. Hwuy-king could not go any farther. A
+white froth came from his mouth, and he said to Fâ-Hien, &ldquo;I cannot live
+any longer. Do you immediately go away, that we do not all die here;&rdquo; and
+with these words he died.(3) Fâ-Hien stroked the corpse, and cried out
+piteously, &ldquo;Our original plan has failed;&mdash;it is fate.(4) What can
+we do?&rdquo; He then again exerted himself, and they succeeded in crossing to
+the south of the range, and arrived in the kingdom of Lo-e,(5) where there were
+nearly three thousand monks, students of both the mahayana and hinayana. Here
+they stayed for the summer retreat,(6) and when that was over, they went on to
+the south, and ten days&rsquo; journey brought them to the kingdom of
+Poh-na,(7) where there are also more than three thousand monks, all students of
+the hinayana. Proceeding from this place for three days, they again crossed the
+Indus, where the country on each side was low and level.(8)
+</p>
+
+<p class="center">
+NOTES
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(1) These must have been Tao-ching and Hwuy-king.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(2) Probably the Safeid Koh, and on the way to the Kohat pass.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(3) All the texts have Kwuy-king. See chapter xii, note 13.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(4) A very natural exclamation, but out of place and inconsistent from the lips
+of Fâ-Hien. The Chinese character {.}, which he employed, may be rendered
+rightly by &ldquo;fate&rdquo; or &ldquo;destiny;&rdquo; but the fate is not
+unintelligent. The term implies a factor, or fa-tor, and supposes the
+ordination of Heaven or God. A Confucian idea for the moment overcame his
+Buddhism.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(5) Lo-e, or Rohi, is a name for Afghanistan; but only a portion of it can be
+here intended.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(6) We are now therefore in 404.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(7) No doubt the present district of Bannu, in the Lieutenant-Governorship of
+the Punjâb, between 32° 10&#x2032; and 33° 15&#x2032; N. lat., and 70°
+26&#x2032; and 72° E. lon. See Hunter&rsquo;s Gazetteer of India, i, p. 393.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(8) They had then crossed the Indus before. They had done so, indeed, twice;
+first, from north to south, at Skardo or east of it; and second, as described
+in chapter vii.
+</p>
+
+</div><!--end chapter-->
+
+<div class="chapter">
+
+<h2><a name="chap15"></a>CHAPTER XV.<br />
+BHIDA. SYMPATHY OF MONKS WITH THE PILGRIMS.</h2>
+
+<p>
+After they had crossed the river, there was a country named Pe-t&rsquo;oo,(1)
+where Buddhism was very flourishing, and (the monks) studied both the mahayana
+and hinayana. When they saw their fellow-disciples from Ts&rsquo;in passing
+along, they were moved with great pity and sympathy, and expressed themselves
+thus: &ldquo;How is it that these men from a border-land should have learned to
+become monks,(2) and come for the sake of our doctrines from such a distance in
+search of the Law of Buddha?&rdquo; They supplied them with what they needed,
+and treated them in accordance with the rules of the Law.
+</p>
+
+<p class="center">
+NOTES
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(1) Bhida. Eitel says, &ldquo;The present Punjâb;&rdquo; i.e. it was a portion
+of that.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(2) &ldquo;To come forth from their families;&rdquo; that is, to become
+celibates, and adopt the tonsure.
+</p>
+
+</div><!--end chapter-->
+
+<div class="chapter">
+
+<h2><a name="chap16"></a>CHAPTER XVI.<br />
+ON TO MATHURA OR MUTTRA. CONDITION AND CUSTOMS OF CENTRAL INDIA; OF THE MONKS,
+VIHARAS, AND MONASTERIES.</h2>
+
+<p>
+From this place they travelled south-east, passing by a succession of very many
+monasteries, with a multitude of monks, who might be counted by myriads. After
+passing all these places, they came to a country named Ma-t&rsquo;aou-lo.(1)
+They still followed the course of the P&rsquo;oo-na(2) river, on the banks of
+which, left and right, there were twenty monasteries, which might contain three
+thousand monks; and (here) the Law of Buddha was still more flourishing.
+Everywhere, from the Sandy Desert, in all the countries of India, the kings had
+been firm believers in that Law. When they make their offerings to a community
+of monks, they take off their royal caps, and along with their relatives and
+ministers, supply them with food with their own hands. That done, (the king)
+has a carpet spread for himself on the ground, and sits down in front of the
+chairman;&mdash;they dare not presume to sit on couches in front of the
+community. The laws and ways, according to which the kings presented their
+offerings when Buddha was in the world, have been handed down to the present
+day.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+All south from this is named the Middle Kingdom.(3) In it the cold and heat are
+finely tempered, and there is neither hoarfrost nor snow. The people are
+numerous and happy; they have not to register their households, or attend to
+any magistrates and their rules; only those who cultivate the royal land have
+to pay (a portion of) the grain from it. If they want to go, they go; if they
+want to stay on, they stay. The king governs without decapitation or (other)
+corporal punishments. Criminals are simply fined, lightly or heavily, according
+to the circumstances (of each case). Even in cases of repeated attempts at
+wicked rebellion, they only have their right hands cut off. The king&rsquo;s
+body-guards and attendants all have salaries. Throughout the whole country the
+people do not kill any living creature, nor drink intoxicating liquor, nor eat
+onions or garlic. The only exception is that of the Chandalas.(4) That is the
+name for those who are (held to be) wicked men, and live apart from others.
+When they enter the gate of a city or a market-place, they strike a piece of
+wood to make themselves known, so that men know and avoid them, and do not come
+into contact with them. In that country they do not keep pigs and fowls, and do
+not sell live cattle; in the markets there are no butchers&rsquo; shops and no
+dealers in intoxicating drink. In buying and selling commodities they use
+cowries.(5) Only the Chandalas are fishermen and hunters, and sell flesh meat.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+After Buddha attained to pari-nirvâna,(6) the kings of the various countries
+and the heads of the Vaisyas(7) built vihâras for the priests, and endowed them
+with fields, houses, gardens, and orchards, along with the resident populations
+and their cattle, the grants being engraved on plates of metal,(8) so that
+afterwards they were handed down from king to king, without any daring to annul
+them, and they remain even to the present time.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+The regular business of the monks is to perform acts of meritorious virtue, and
+to recite their Sûtras and sit wrapt in meditation. When stranger monks arrive
+(at any monastery), the old residents meet and receive them, carry for them
+their clothes and alms-bowl, give them water to wash their feet, oil with which
+to anoint them, and the liquid food permitted out of the regular hours.(9) When
+(the stranger) has enjoyed a very brief rest, they further ask the number of
+years that he has been a monk, after which he receives a sleeping apartment
+with its appurtenances, according to his regular order, and everything is done
+for him which the rules prescribe.(10)
+</p>
+
+<p>
+Where a community of monks resides, they erect topes to Sariputtra,(11) to
+Maha-maudgalyayana,(12) and to Ananda,(13) and also topes (in honour) of the
+Abhidharma, the Vinaya, and the Sûtras. A month after the (annual season of)
+rest, the families which are looking out for blessing stimulate one another(14)
+to make offerings to the monks, and send round to them the liquid food which
+may be taken out of the ordinary hours. All the monks come together in a great
+assembly, and preach the Law;(15) after which offerings are presented at the
+tope of Sariputtra, with all kinds of flowers and incense. All through the
+night lamps are kept burning, and skilful musicians are employed to
+perform.(16)
+</p>
+
+<p>
+When Sariputtra was a great Brahman, he went to Buddha, and begged (to be
+permitted) to quit his family (and become a monk). The great Mugalan and the
+great Kasyapa(17) also did the same. The bhikshunis(18) for the most part make
+their offerings at the tope of Ananda, because it was he who requested the
+World-honoured one to allow females to quit their families (and become nuns).
+The Sramaneras(19) mostly make their offerings to Rahula.(20) The professors of
+the Abhidharma make their offerings to it; those of the Vinaya to it. Every
+year there is one such offering, and each class has its own day for it.
+Students of the mahayana present offerings to the Prajna-paramita,(21) to
+Manjusri,(22) and to Kwan-she-yin.(23) When the monks have done receiving their
+annual tribute (from the harvests),(24) the Heads of the Vaisyas and all the
+Brahmans bring clothes and other such articles as the monks require for use,
+and distribute among them. The monks, having received them, also proceed to
+give portions to one another. From the nirvâna of Buddha,(25) the forms of
+ceremony, laws, and rules, practised by the sacred communities, have been
+handed down from one generation to another without interruption.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+From the place where (the travellers) crossed the Indus to Southern India, and
+on to the Southern Sea, a distance of forty or fifty thousand le, all is level
+plain. There are no large hills with streams (among them); there are simply the
+waters of the rivers.
+</p>
+
+<p class="center">
+NOTES
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(1) Muttra, &ldquo;the peacock city;&rdquo; lat. 27° 30&#x2032; N., lon. 77°
+43&#x2032; E. (Hunter); the birthplace of Krishna, whose emblem is the peacock.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(2) This must be the Jumna, or Yamuna. Why it is called, as here, the
+P&rsquo;oo-na has yet to be explained.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(3) In Pâli, Majjhima-desa, &ldquo;the Middle Country.&rdquo; See Davids&rsquo;
+&ldquo;Buddhist Birth Stories,&rdquo; page 61, note.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(4) Eitel (pp. 145, 6) says, &ldquo;The name Chandalas is explained by
+&lsquo;butchers,&rsquo; &lsquo;wicked men,&rsquo; and those who carry
+&lsquo;the awful flag,&rsquo; to warn off their betters;&mdash;the lowest and
+most despised caste of India, members of which, however, when converted, were
+admitted even into the ranks of the priesthood.&rdquo;
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(5) &ldquo;Cowries;&rdquo; {.} {.}, not &ldquo;shells and ivory,&rdquo; as one
+might suppose; but cowries alone, the second term entering into the name from
+the marks inside the edge of the shell, resembling &ldquo;the teeth of
+fishes.&rdquo;
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(6) See chapter xii, note 3, Buddha&rsquo;s pari-nirvâna is equivalent to
+Buddha&rsquo;s death.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(7) See chapter xiii, note 6. The order of the characters is different here,
+but with the same meaning.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(8) See the preparation of such a deed of grant in a special case, as related
+in chapter xxxix. No doubt in Fâ-Hien&rsquo;s time, and long before and after
+it, it was the custom to engrave such deeds on plates of metal.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(9) &ldquo;No monk can eat solid food except between sunrise and noon,&rdquo;
+and total abstinence from intoxicating drinks is obligatory (Davids&rsquo;
+Manual, p. 163). Food eaten at any other part of the day is called vikala, and
+forbidden; but a weary traveller might receive unseasonable refreshment,
+consisting, as Watters has shown (Ch. Rev. viii. 282), of honey, butter,
+treacle, and sesamum oil.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(10) The expression here is somewhat perplexing; but it occurs again in chapter
+xxxviii; and the meaning is clear. See Watters, Ch. Rev. viii. 282, 3. The
+rules are given at length in the Sacred Books of the East, vol. xx, p. 272 and
+foll., and p. 279 and foll.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(11) Sariputtra (Singh. Seriyut) was one of the principal disciples of Buddha,
+and indeed the most learned and ingenious of them all, so that he obtained the
+title of {.} {.}, &ldquo;knowledge and wisdom.&rdquo; He is also called
+Buddha&rsquo;s &ldquo;right-hand attendant.&rdquo; His name is derived from
+that of his mother Sarika, the wife of Tishya, a native of Nalanda. In Spence
+Hardy, he often appears under the name of Upatissa (Upa-tishya), derived from
+his father. Several Sastras are ascribed to him, and indeed the followers of
+the Abhidharma look on him as their founder. He died before Sâkyamuni; but is
+to reappear as a future Buddha. Eitel, pp. 123, 124.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(12) Mugalan, the Singhalese name of this disciple, is more pronounceable. He
+also was one of the principal disciples, called Buddha&rsquo;s &ldquo;left-hand
+attendant.&rdquo; He was distinguished for his power of vision, and his magical
+powers. The name in the text is derived from the former attribute, and it was
+by the latter that he took up an artist to Tushita to get a view of Sâkyamuni,
+and so make a statue of him. (Compare the similar story in chap. vi.) He went
+to hell, and released his mother. He also died before Sâkyamuni, and is to
+reappear as Buddha. Eitel, p. 65.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(13) See chapter xii, note 2.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(14) A passage rather difficult to construe. The &ldquo;families&rdquo; would
+be those more devout than their neighbours.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(15) One rarely hears this preaching in China. It struck me most as I once
+heard it at Osaka in Japan. There was a pulpit in a large hall of the temple,
+and the audience sat around on the matted floor. One priest took the pulpit
+after another; and the hearers nodded their heads occasionally, and indicated
+their sympathy now and then by an audible &ldquo;h&rsquo;m,&rdquo; which
+reminded me of Carlyle&rsquo;s description of meetings of &ldquo;The
+Ironsides&rdquo; of Cromwell.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(16) This last statement is wanting in the Chinese editions.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(17) There was a Kasyapa Buddha, anterior to Sâkyamuni. But this Maha-kasyapa
+was a Brahman of Magadha, who was converted by Buddha, and became one of his
+disciples. He took the lead after Sâkyamuni&rsquo;s death, convoked and
+directed the first synod, from which his title of Arya-sthavira is derived. As
+the first compiler of the Canon, he is considered the fountain of Chinese
+orthodoxy, and counted as the first patriarch. He also is to be reborn as
+Buddha. Eitel, p. 64.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(18) The bhikshunis are the female monks or nuns, subject to the same rules as
+the bhikshus, and also to special ordinances of restraint. See Hardy&rsquo;s E.
+M., chap. 17. See also Sacred Books of the East, vol. xx, p. 321.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(19) The Sramaneras are the novices, male or female, who have vowed to observe
+the Shikshapada, or ten commandments. Fâ-Hien was himself one of them from his
+childhood. Having heard the Trisharana, or threefold formula of
+Refuge,&mdash;&ldquo;I take refuge in Buddha; the Law; the Church,&mdash;the
+novice undertakes to observe the ten precepts that forbid&mdash;(1) destroying
+life; (2) stealing; (3) impurity; (4) lying; (5) intoxicating drinks; (6)
+eating after midday; (7) dancing, singing, music, and stage-plays; (8)
+garlands, scents, unguents, and ornaments; (9) high or broad couches; (10)
+receiving gold or silver.&rdquo; Davids&rsquo; Manual, p. 160; Hardy&rsquo;s E.
+M., pp. 23, 24.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(20) The eldest son of Sâkyamuni by Yasodhara. Converted to Buddhism, he
+followed his father as an attendant; and after Buddha&rsquo;s death became the
+founder of a philosophical realistic school (vaibhashika). He is now revered as
+the patron saint of all novices, and is to be reborn as the eldest son of every
+future Buddha. Eitel, p. 101. His mother also is to be reborn as Buddha.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(21) There are six (sometimes increased to ten) paramitas, &ldquo;means of
+passing to nirvâna:&mdash;Charity; morality; patience; energy; tranquil
+contemplation; wisdom (prajna); made up to ten by use of the proper means;
+science; pious vows; and force of purpose. But it is only prajna which carries
+men across the samsara to the shores of nirvâna.&rdquo; Eitel, p. 90.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(22) According to Eitel (pp. 71, 72), A famous Bodhisattva, now specially
+worshipped in Shan-se, whose antecedents are a hopeless jumble of history and
+fable. Fâ-Hien found him here worshipped by followers of the mahayana school;
+but Hsuan-chwang connects his worship with the yogachara or tantra-magic
+school. The mahayana school regard him as the apotheosis of perfect wisdom. His
+most common titles are Mahamati, &ldquo;Great wisdom,&rdquo; and Kumara-raja,
+&ldquo;King of teaching, with a thousand arms and a hundred alms-bowls.&rdquo;
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(23) Kwan-she-yin and the dogmas about him or her are as great a mystery as
+Manjusri. The Chinese name is a mistranslation of the Sanskrit name
+Avalokitesvra, &ldquo;On-looking Sovereign,&rdquo; or even &ldquo;On-looking
+Self-Existent,&rdquo; and means &ldquo;Regarding or Looking on the sounds of
+the world,&rdquo;=&ldquo;Hearer of Prayer.&rdquo; Originally, and still in
+Thibet, Avalokitesvara had only male attributes, but in China and Japan
+(Kwannon), this deity (such popularly she is) is represented as a woman,
+&ldquo;Kwan-yin, the greatly gentle, with a thousand arms and a thousand
+eyes;&rdquo; and has her principal seat in the island of P&rsquo;oo-t&rsquo;oo,
+on the China coast, which is a regular place of pilgrimage. To the worshippers
+of whom Fâ-Hien speaks, Kwan-she-yin would only be Avalokitesvara. How he was
+converted into the &ldquo;goddess of mercy,&rdquo; and her worship took the
+place which it now has in China, is a difficult inquiry, which would take much
+time and space, and not be brought after all, so far as I see, to a
+satisfactory conclusion. See Eitel&rsquo;s Handbook, pp. 18-20, and his Three
+Lectures on Buddhism (third edition), pp. 124-131. I was talking on the subject
+once with an intelligent Chinese gentleman, when he remarked, &ldquo;Have you
+not much the same thing in Europe in the worship of Mary?&rdquo;
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(24) Compare what is said in chap. v.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(25) This nirvâna of Buddha must be&mdash;not his death, but his attaining to
+Buddhaship.
+</p>
+
+</div><!--end chapter-->
+
+<div class="chapter">
+
+<h2><a name="chap17"></a>CHAPTER XVII.<br />
+SANKASYA. BUDDHA&rsquo;S ASCENT TO AND DESCENT FROM THE TRAYASTRIMSAS HEAVEN,
+AND OTHER LEGENDS.</h2>
+
+<p>
+From this they proceeded south-east for eighteen yojanas, and found themselves
+in a kingdom called Sankasya,(1) at the place where Buddha came down, after
+ascending to the Trayastrimsas heaven,(2) and there preaching for three months
+his Law for the benefit of his mother.(3) Buddha had gone up to this heaven by
+his supernatural power,(4) without letting his disciples know; but seven days
+before the completion (of the three months) he laid aside his invisibility,(4)
+and Anuruddha,(5) with his heavenly eyes,(5) saw the World-honoured one, and
+immediately said to the honoured one, the great Mugalan, &ldquo;Do you go and
+salute the World-honoured one.&rdquo; Mugalan forthwith went, and with head and
+face did homage at (Buddha&rsquo;s) feet. They then saluted and questioned each
+other, and when this was over, Buddha said to Mugalan, &ldquo;Seven days after
+this I will go down to Jambudvipa;&rdquo; and thereupon Mugalan returned. At
+this time the great kings of eight countries with their ministers and people,
+not having seen Buddha for a long time, were all thirstily looking up for him,
+and had collected in clouds in this kingdom to wait for the World-honoured one.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+Then the bhikshuni Utpala(6) thought in her heart, &ldquo;To-day the kings,
+with their ministers and people, will all be meeting (and welcoming) Buddha. I
+am (but) a woman; how shall I succeed in being the first to see him?&rdquo;(7)
+Buddha immediately, by his spirit-like power, changed her into the appearance
+of a holy Chakravartti(8) king, and she was the foremost of all in doing
+reverence to him.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+As Buddha descended from his position aloft in the Trayastrimsas heaven, when
+he was coming down, there were made to appear three flights of precious steps.
+Buddha was on the middle flight, the steps of which were composed of the seven
+precious substances. The king of Brahma-loka(9) also made a flight of silver
+steps appear on the right side, (where he was seen) attending with a white
+chowry in his hand. Sakra, Ruler of Devas, made (a flight of) steps of purple
+gold on the left side, (where he was seen) attending and holding an umbrella of
+the seven precious substances. An innumerable multitude of the devas followed
+Buddha in his descent. When he was come down, the three flights all disappeared
+in the ground, excepting seven steps, which continued to be visible. Afterwards
+king Asoka, wishing to know where their ends rested, sent men to dig and see.
+They went down to the yellow springs(10) without reaching the bottom of the
+steps, and from this the king received an increase to his reverence and faith,
+and built a vihâra over the steps, with a standing image, sixteen cubits in
+height, right over the middle flight. Behind the vihâra he erected a stone
+pillar, about fifty cubits high,(11) with a lion on the top of it.(12) Let into
+the pillar, on each of its four sides,(13) there is an image of Buddha, inside
+and out(14) shining and transparent, and pure as it were of <i>lapis
+lazuli</i>. Some teachers of another doctrine(15) once disputed with the
+Sramanas about (the right to) this as a place of residence, and the latter were
+having the worst of the argument, when they took an oath on both sides on the
+condition that, if the place did indeed belong to the Sramanas, there should be
+some marvellous attestation of it. When these words had been spoken, the lion
+on the top gave a great roar, thus giving the proof; on which their opponents
+were frightened, bowed to the decision, and withdrew.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+Through Buddha having for three months partaken of the food of heaven, his body
+emitted a heavenly fragrance, unlike that of an ordinary man. He went
+immediately and bathed; and afterwards, at the spot where he did so, a
+bathing-house was built, which is still existing. At the place where the
+bhikshuni Utpala was the first to do reverence to Buddha, a tope has now been
+built.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+At the places where Buddha, when he was in the world, cut his hair and nails,
+topes are erected; and where the three Buddhas(16) that preceded Sâkyamuni
+Buddha and he himself sat; where they walked,(17) and where images of their
+persons were made. At all these places topes were made, and are still existing.
+At the place where Sakra, Ruler of the Devas, and the king of the Brahma-loka
+followed Buddha down (from the Trayastrimsas heaven) they have also raised a
+tope.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+At this place the monks and nuns may be a thousand, who all receive their food
+from the common store, and pursue their studies, some of the mahayana and some
+of the hinayana. Where they live, there is a white-eared dragon, which acts the
+part of danapati to the community of these monks, causing abundant harvests in
+the country, and the enriching rains to come in season, without the occurrence
+of any calamities, so that the monks enjoy their repose and ease. In gratitude
+for its kindness, they have made for it a dragon-house, with a carpet for it to
+sit on, and appointed for it a diet of blessing, which they present for its
+nourishment. Every day they set apart three of their number to go to its house,
+and eat there. Whenever the summer retreat is ended, the dragon straightway
+changes its form, and appears as a small snake,(18) with white spots at the
+side of its ears. As soon as the monks recognise it, they fill a copper vessel
+with cream, into which they put the creature, and then carry it round from the
+one who has the highest seat (at their tables) to him who has the lowest, when
+it appears as if saluting them. When it has been taken round, immediately it
+disappeared; and every year it thus comes forth once. The country is very
+productive, and the people are prosperous, and happy beyond comparison. When
+people of other countries come to it, they are exceedingly attentive to them
+all, and supply them with what they need.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+Fifty yojanas north-west from the monastery there is another, called &ldquo;The
+Great Heap.&rdquo;(19) Great Heap was the name of a wicked demon, who was
+converted by Buddha, and men subsequently at this place reared a vihâra. When
+it was being made over to an Arhat by pouring water on his hands,(20) some
+drops fell on the ground. They are still on the spot, and however they may be
+brushed away and removed, they continue to be visible, and cannot be made to
+disappear.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+At this place there is also a tope to Buddha, where a good spirit constantly
+keeps (all about it) swept and watered, without any labour of man being
+required. A king of corrupt views once said, &ldquo;Since you are able to do
+this, I will lead a multitude of troops and reside there till the dirt and
+filth has increased and accumulated, and (see) whether you can cleanse it away
+or not.&rdquo; The spirit thereupon raised a great wind, which blew (the filth
+away), and made the place pure.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+At this place there are a hundred small topes, at which a man may keep counting
+a whole day without being able to know (their exact number). If he be firmly
+bent on knowing it, he will place a man by the side of each tope. When this is
+done, proceeding to count the number of men, whether they be many or few, he
+will not get to know (the number).(21)
+</p>
+
+<p>
+There is a monastery, containing perhaps 600 or 700 monks, in which there is a
+place where a Pratyeka Buddha used to take his food. The nirvâna ground (where
+he was burned(22) after death) is as large as a carriage wheel; and while grass
+grows all around, on this spot there is none. The ground also where he dried
+his clothes produces no grass, but the impression of them, where they lay on
+it, continues to the present day.
+</p>
+
+<p class="center">
+NOTES
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(1) The name is still remaining in Samkassam, a village forty-five miles
+northwest of Canouge, lat. 27° 3&#x2032; N., lon. 79° 50&#x2032; E.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(2) The heaven of Indra or Sakya, meaning &ldquo;the heaven of thirty-three
+classes,&rdquo; a name which has been explained both historically and
+mythologically. &ldquo;The description of it,&rdquo; says Eitel, p. 148,
+&ldquo;tallies in all respects with the Svarga of Brahmanic mythology. It is
+situated between the four peaks of the Meru, and consists of thirty-two cities
+of devas, eight on each of the four corners of the mountain. Indra&rsquo;s
+capital of Bellevue is in the centre. There he is enthroned, with a thousand
+heads and a thousand eyes, and four arms grasping the vajra, with his wife and
+119,000 concubines. There he receives the monthly reports of the four
+Maharajas, concerning the progress of good and evil in the world,&rdquo;
+&amp;c. &amp;c.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(3) Buddha&rsquo;s mother, Maya and Mahamaya, the <i>mater immaculata</i> of
+the Buddhists, died seven days after his birth. Eitel says, &ldquo;Reborn in
+Tushita, she was visited there by her son and converted.&rdquo; The Tushita
+heaven was a more likely place to find her than the Trayastrimsas; but was the
+former a part of the latter? Hardy gives a long account of Buddha&rsquo;s visit
+to the Trayastrimsas (M. B., pp. 298-302), which he calls Tawutisa, and speaks
+of his mother (Matru) in it, who had now become a deva by the changing of her
+sex.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(4) Compare the account of the Arhat&rsquo;s conveyance of the artist to the
+Tushita heaven in chap. v. The first expression here is more comprehensive.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(5) Anuruddha was a first cousin of Sâkyamuni, being the son of his uncle
+Amritodana. He is often mentioned in the account we have of Buddha&rsquo;s last
+moments. His special gift was the divyachakshus or &ldquo;heavenly eye,&rdquo;
+the first of the six abhijnas or &ldquo;supernatural talents,&rdquo; the
+faculty of comprehending in one instantaneous view, or by intuition, all beings
+in all worlds. &ldquo;He could see,&rdquo; says Hardy, M. B., p. 232,
+&ldquo;all things in 100,000 sakvalas as plainly as a mustard seed held in the
+hand.&rdquo;
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(6) Eitel gives the name Utpala with the same Chinese phonetisation as in the
+text, but not as the name of any bhikshuni. The Sanskrit word, however, is
+explained by &ldquo;blue lotus flowers;&rdquo; and Hsuan-chwang calls her the
+nun &ldquo;Lotus-flower colour ({.} {.} {.});&rdquo;&mdash;the same as
+Hardy&rsquo;s Upulwan and Uppalawarna.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(7) Perhaps we should read here &ldquo;to see Buddha,&rdquo; and then ascribe
+the transformation to the nun herself. It depends on the punctuation which view
+we adopt; and in the structure of the passage, there is nothing to indicate
+that the stop should be made before or after &ldquo;Buddha.&rdquo; And the one
+view is as reasonable, or rather as unreasonable, as the other.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(8) &ldquo;A holy king who turns the wheel;&rdquo; that is, the military
+conqueror and monarch of the whole or part of a universe. &ldquo;The
+symbol,&rdquo; says Eitel (p. 142) &ldquo;of such a king is the chakra or
+wheel, for when he ascends the throne, a chakra falls from heaven, indicating
+by its material (gold, silver, copper, or iron) the extent and character of his
+reign. The office, however, of the highest Chakravartti, who hurls his wheel
+among his enemies, is inferior to the peaceful mission of a Buddha, who meekly
+turns the wheel of the Law, and conquers every universe by his teaching.&rdquo;
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(9) This was Brahma, the first person of the Brahmanical Trimurti, adopted by
+Buddhism, but placed in an inferior position, and surpassed by every Buddhist
+saint who attains to bodhi.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(10) A common name for the earth below, where, on digging, water is found.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(11) The height is given as thirty chow, the chow being the distance from the
+elbow to the finger-tip, which is variously estimated.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(12) A note of Mr. Beal says on this:&mdash;&ldquo;General Cunningham, who
+visited the spot (1862), found a pillar, evidently of the age of Asoka, with a
+well-carved elephant on the top, which, however, was minus trunk and tail. He
+supposes this to be the pillar seen by Fâ-Hien, who mistook the top of it for
+a lion. It is possible such a mistake may have been made, as in the account of
+one of the pillars at Sravasti, Fâ-Hien says an ox formed the capital, whilst
+Hsuan-chwang calls it an elephant (P. 19, Arch. Survey).&rdquo;
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(13) That is, in niches on the sides. The pillar or column must have been
+square.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(14) Equivalent to &ldquo;all through.&rdquo;
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(15) Has always been translated &ldquo;heretical teachers;&rdquo; but I eschew
+the terms <i>heresy</i> and <i>heretical</i>. The parties would not be
+Buddhists of any creed or school, but Brahmans or of some other false doctrine,
+as Fâ-Hien deemed it. The Chinese term means &ldquo;outside&rdquo; or
+&ldquo;foreign;&rdquo;&mdash;in Pâli, anna-titthiya,=&ldquo;those belonging to
+another school.&rdquo;
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(16) These three predecessors of Sâkyamuni were the three Buddhas of the
+present or Maha-bhadra Kalpa, of which he was the fourth, and Maitreya is to be
+the fifth and last. They were: (1) Krakuchanda (Pâli, Kakusanda), &ldquo;he who
+readily solves all doubts;&rdquo; a scion of the Kasyapa family. Human life
+reached in his time 40,000 years, and so many persons were converted by him.
+(2) Kanakamuni (Pâli, Konagamana), &ldquo;body radiant with the colour of pure
+gold;&rdquo; of the same family. Human life reached in his time 30,000 years,
+and so many persons were converted by him. (3) Kasyapa (Pâli, Kassapa),
+&ldquo;swallower of light.&rdquo; Human life reached in his time 20,000 years,
+and so many persons were converted by him. See Eitel, under the several names;
+Hardy&rsquo;s M. B., pp. 95-97; and Davids&rsquo; &ldquo;Buddhist Birth
+Stories,&rdquo; p. 51.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(17) That is, walked in meditation. Such places are called Chankramana (Pâli,
+Chankama); promenades or corridors connected with a monastery, made sometimes
+with costly stones, for the purpose of peripatetic meditation. The
+&ldquo;sitting&rdquo; would be not because of weariness or for rest, but for
+meditation. E. H., p. 144.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(18) The character in my Corean copy is {.}, which must be a mistake for the
+{.} of the Chinese editions. Otherwise, the meaning would be &ldquo;a small
+medusa.&rdquo;
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(19) The reading here seems to me a great improvement on that of the Chinese
+editions, which means &ldquo;Fire Limit.&rdquo; Buddha, it is said, {.}
+converted this demon, which Chinese character Beal rendered at first by
+&ldquo;in one of his incarnations;&rdquo; and in his revised version he has
+&ldquo;himself.&rdquo; The difference between Fâ-Hien&rsquo;s usage of {.} and
+{.} throughout his narrative is quite marked. {.} always refers to the doings
+of Sâkyamuni; {.}, &ldquo;formerly,&rdquo; is often used of him and others in
+the sense of &ldquo;in a former age or birth.&rdquo;
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(20) See Hardy, M. B., p. 194:&mdash;&ldquo;As a token of the giving over of
+the garden, the king poured water upon the hands of Buddha; and from this time
+it became one of the principal residences of the sage.&rdquo;
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(21) This would seem to be absurd; but the writer evidently intended to convey
+the idea that there was something mysterious about the number of the topes.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(22) This seems to be the meaning. The bodies of the monks are all burned.
+Hardy&rsquo;s E. M., pp. 322-324.
+</p>
+
+</div><!--end chapter-->
+
+<div class="chapter">
+
+<h2><a name="chap18"></a>CHAPTER XVIII.<br />
+KANYAKUBJA, OR CANOUGE. BUDDHA&rsquo;S PREACHING.</h2>
+
+<p>
+Fâ-Hien stayed at the Dragon vihâra till after the summer retreat,(1) and
+then, travelling to the south-east for seven yojanas, he arrived at the city of
+Kanyakubja,(2) lying along the Ganges.(3) There are two monasteries in it, the
+inmates of which are students of the hinayana. At a distance from the city of
+six or seven le, on the west, on the northern bank of the Ganges, is a place
+where Buddha preached the Law to his disciples. It has been handed down that
+his subjects of discourse were such as &ldquo;The bitterness and vanity (of
+life) as impermanent and uncertain,&rdquo; and that &ldquo;The body is as a
+bubble or foam on the water.&rdquo; At this spot a tope was erected, and still
+exists.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+Having crossed the Ganges, and gone south for three yojanas, (the travellers)
+arrived at a village named A-le,(4) containing places where Buddha preached the
+Law, where he sat, and where he walked, at all of which topes have been built.
+</p>
+
+<p class="center">
+NOTES
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(1) We are now, probably, in 405.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(2) Canouge, the latitude and longitude of which have been given in a previous
+note. The Sanskrit name means &ldquo;the city of humpbacked maidens;&rdquo;
+with reference to the legend of the hundred daughters of king Brahma-datta, who
+were made deformed by the curse of the rishi Maha-vriksha, whose overtures they
+had refused. E. H., p. 51.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(3) Ganga, explained by &ldquo;Blessed water,&rdquo; and &ldquo;Come from
+heaven to earth.&rdquo;
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(4) This village (the Chinese editions read &ldquo;forest&rdquo;) has hardly
+been clearly identified.
+</p>
+
+</div><!--end chapter-->
+
+<div class="chapter">
+
+<h2><a name="chap19"></a>CHAPTER XIX.<br />
+SHA-CHE. LEGEND OF BUDDHA&rsquo;S DANTA-KASHTHA.</h2>
+
+<p>
+Going on from this to the south-east for three yojanas, they came to the great
+kingdom of Sha-che.(1) As you go out of the city of Sha-che by the southern
+gate, on the east of the road (is the place) where Buddha, after he had chewed
+his willow branch,(2) stuck it in the ground, when it forthwith grew up seven
+cubits, (at which height it remained) neither increasing nor diminishing. The
+Brahmans with their contrary doctrines(3) became angry and jealous. Sometimes
+they cut the tree down, sometimes they plucked it up, and cast it to a
+distance, but it grew again on the same spot as at first. Here also is the
+place where the four Buddhas walked and sat, and at which a tope was built that
+is still existing.
+</p>
+
+<p class="center">
+NOTES
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(1) Sha-che should probably be Sha-khe, making Cunningham&rsquo;s
+identification of the name with the present Saket still more likely. The change
+of {.} into {.} is slight; and, indeed, the Khang-hsi dictionary thinks the two
+characters should be but one and the same.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(2) This was, no doubt, what was called the danta-kashtha, or &ldquo;dental
+wood,&rdquo; mostly a bit of the <i>ficus Indicus</i> or banyan tree, which the
+monk chews every morning to cleanse his teeth, and for the purpose of health
+generally. The Chinese, not having the banyan, have used, or at least Fâ-Hien
+used, Yang ({.}, the general name for the willow) instead of it.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(3) Are two classes of opponents, or only one, intended here, so that we should
+read &ldquo;all the unbelievers and Brahmans,&rdquo; or &ldquo;heretics and
+Brahmans?&rdquo; I think the Brahmans were also &ldquo;the unbelievers&rdquo;
+and &ldquo;heretics,&rdquo; having {.} {.}, views and ways outside of, and
+opposed to, Buddha&rsquo;s.
+</p>
+
+</div><!--end chapter-->
+
+<div class="chapter">
+
+<h2><a name="chap20"></a>CHAPTER XX.<br />
+KOSALA AND SRAVASTI. THE JETAVANA VIHARA AND OTHER MEMORIALS AND LEGENDS OF
+BUDDHA. SYMPATHY OF THE MONKS WITH THE PILGRIMS.</h2>
+
+<p>
+Going on from this to the south, for eight yojanas, (the travellers) came to
+the city of Sravasti(1) in the kingdom of Kosala,(2) in which the inhabitants
+were few and far between, amounting in all (only) to a few more than two
+hundred families; the city where king Prasenajit(3) ruled, and the place of the
+old vihâra of Maha-prajapti;(4) of the well and walls of (the house of) the
+(Vaisya) head Sudatta;(5) and where the Angulimalya(6) became an Arhat, and his
+body was (afterwards) burned on his attaining to pari-nirvâna. At all these
+places topes were subsequently erected, which are still existing in the city.
+The Brahmans, with their contrary doctrine, became full of hatred and envy in
+their hearts, and wished to destroy them, but there came from the heavens such
+a storm of crashing thunder and flashing lightning that they were not able in
+the end to effect their purpose.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+As you go out from the city by the south gate, and 1,200 paces from it, the
+(Vaisya) head Sudatta built a vihâra, facing the south; and when the door was
+open, on each side of it there was a stone pillar, with the figure of a wheel
+on the top of that on the left, and the figure of an ox on the top of that on
+the right. On the left and right of the building the ponds of water clear and
+pure, the thickets of trees always luxuriant, and the numerous flowers of
+various hues, constituted a lovely scene, the whole forming what is called the
+Jetavana vihâra.(7)
+</p>
+
+<p>
+When Buddha went up to the Trayastrimsas heaven,(8) and preached the Law for
+the benefit of his mother, (after he had been absent for) ninety days,
+Prasenajit, longing to see him, caused an image of him to be carved in Gosîrsha
+Chandana wood,(9) and put in the place where he usually sat. When Buddha on his
+return entered the vihâra, this image immediately left its place, and came
+forth to meet him. Buddha said to it, &ldquo;Return to your seat. After I have
+attained to pari-nirvâna, you will serve as a pattern to the four classes of my
+disciples,&rdquo;(10) and on this the image returned to its seat. This was the
+very first of all the images (of Buddha), and that which men subsequently
+copied. Buddha then removed, and dwelt in a small vihâra on the south side (of
+the other), a different place from that containing the image, and twenty paces
+distant from it.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+The Jetavana vihâra was originally of seven storeys. The kings and people of
+the countries around vied with one another in their offerings, hanging up about
+it silken streamers and canopies, scattering flowers, burning incense, and
+lighting lamps, so as to make the night as bright as the day. This they did day
+after day without ceasing. (It happened that) a rat, carrying in its mouth the
+wick of a lamp, set one of the streamers or canopies on fire, which caught the
+vihâra, and the seven storeys were all consumed. The kings, with their officers
+and people, were all very sad and distressed, supposing that the sandal-wood
+image had been burned; but lo! after four or five days, when the door of a
+small vihâra on the east was opened, there was immediately seen the original
+image. They were all greatly rejoiced, and co-operated in restoring the vihâra.
+When they had succeeded in completing two storeys, they removed the image back
+to its former place.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+When Fâ-Hien and Tao-ching first arrived at the Jetavana monastery, and
+thought how the World-honoured one had formerly resided there for twenty-five
+years, painful reflections arose in their minds. Born in a border-land, along
+with their like-minded friends, they had travelled through so many kingdoms;
+some of those friends had returned (to their own land), and some had (died),
+proving the impermanence and uncertainty of life; and to-day they saw the place
+where Buddha had lived now unoccupied by him. They were melancholy through
+their pain of heart, and the crowd of monks came out, and asked them from what
+kingdom they were come. &ldquo;We are come,&rdquo; they replied, &ldquo;from
+the land of Han.&rdquo; &ldquo;Strange,&rdquo; said the monks with a sigh,
+&ldquo;that men of a border country should be able to come here in search of
+our Law!&rdquo; Then they said to one another, &ldquo;During all the time that
+we, preceptors and monks,(11) have succeeded to one another, we have never seen
+men of Han, followers of our system, arrive here.&rdquo;
+</p>
+
+<p>
+Four le to the north-west of the vihâra there is a grove called &ldquo;The
+Getting of Eyes.&rdquo; Formerly there were five hundred blind men, who lived
+here in order that they might be near the vihâra.(12) Buddha preached his Law
+to them, and they all got back their eyesight. Full of joy, they stuck their
+staves in the earth, and with their heads and faces on the ground, did
+reverence. The staves immediately began to grow, and they grew to be great.
+People made much of them, and no one dared to cut them down, so that they came
+to form a grove. It was in this way that it got its name, and most of the
+Jetavana monks, after they had taken their midday meal, went to the grove, and
+sat there in meditation.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+Six or seven le north-east from the Jetavana, mother Vaisakha(13) built another
+vihâra, to which she invited Buddha and his monks, and which is still existing.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+To each of the great residences for monks at the Jetavana vihâra there were two
+gates, one facing the east and the other facing the north. The park (containing
+the whole) was the space of ground which the (Vaisya) head Sudatta purchased by
+covering it with gold coins. The vihâra was exactly in the centre. Here Buddha
+lived for a longer time than at any other place, preaching his Law and
+converting men. At the places where he walked and sat they also (subsequently)
+reared topes, each having its particular name; and here was the place where
+Sundari(14) murdered a person and then falsely charged Buddha (with the crime).
+Outside the east gate of the Jetavana, at a distance of seventy paces to the
+north, on the west of the road, Buddha held a discussion with the (advocates of
+the) ninety-six schemes of erroneous doctrine, when the king and his great
+officers, the householders, and people were all assembled in crowds to hear it.
+Then a woman belonging to one of the erroneous systems, by name
+Chanchamana,(15) prompted by the envious hatred in her heart, and having put on
+(extra) clothes in front of her person, so as to give her the appearance of
+being with child, falsely accused Buddha before all the assembly of having
+acted unlawfully (towards her). On this, Sakra, Ruler of Devas, changed himself
+and some devas into white mice, which bit through the strings about her waist;
+and when this was done, the (extra) clothes which she wore dropt down on the
+ground. The earth at the same time was rent, and she went (down) alive into
+hell.(16) (This) also is the place where Devadatta,(17) trying with empoisoned
+claws to injure Buddha, went down alive into hell. Men subsequently set up
+marks to distinguish where both these events took place.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+Further, at the place where the discussion took place, they reared a vihâra
+rather more than sixty cubits high, having in it an image of Buddha in a
+sitting posture. On the east of the road there was a devalaya(18) of (one of)
+the contrary systems, called &ldquo;The Shadow Covered,&rdquo; right opposite
+the vihâra on the place of discussion, with (only) the road between them, and
+also rather more than sixty cubits high. The reason why it was called
+&ldquo;The Shadow Covered&rdquo; was this:&mdash;When the sun was in the west,
+the shadow of the vihâra of the World-honoured one fell on the devalaya of a
+contrary system; but when the sun was in the east, the shadow of that devalaya
+was diverted to the north, and never fell on the vihâra of Buddha. The
+mal-believers regularly employed men to watch their devalaya, to sweep and
+water (all about it), to burn incense, light the lamps, and present offerings;
+but in the morning the lamps were found to have been suddenly removed, and in
+the vihâra of Buddha. The Brahmans were indignant, and said, &ldquo;Those
+Sramanas take out lamps and use them for their own service of Buddha, but we
+will not stop our service for you!&rdquo;(19) On that night the Brahmans
+themselves kept watch, when they saw the deva spirits which they served take
+the lamps and go three times round the vihâra of Buddha and present offerings.
+After this ministration to Buddha they suddenly disappeared. The Brahmans
+thereupon knowing how great was the spiritual power of Buddha, forthwith left
+their families, and became monks.(20) It has been handed down, that, near the
+time when these things occurred, around the Jetavana vihâra there were
+ninety-eight monasteries, in all of which there were monks residing, excepting
+only in one place which was vacant. In this Middle Kingdom(21) there are
+ninety-six(21) sorts of views, erroneous and different from our system, all of
+which recognise this world and the future world(22) (and the connexion between
+them). Each had its multitude of followers, and they all beg their food: only
+they do not carry the alms-bowl. They also, moreover, seek (to acquire) the
+blessing (of good deeds) on unfrequented ways, setting up on the road-side
+houses of charity, where rooms, couches, beds, and food and drink are supplied
+to travellers, and also to monks, coming and going as guests, the only
+difference being in the time (for which those parties remain).
+</p>
+
+<p>
+There are also companies of the followers of Devadatta still existing. They
+regularly make offerings to the three previous Buddhas, but not to Sâkyamuni
+Buddha.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+Four le south-east from the city of Sravasti, a tope has been erected at the
+place where the World-honoured one encountered king Virudhaha,(23) when he
+wished to attack the kingdom of Shay-e,(23) and took his stand before him at
+the side of the road.(24)
+</p>
+
+<p class="center">
+NOTES
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(1) In Singhalese, Sewet; here evidently the capital of Kosala. It is placed by
+Cunningham (Archaeological Survey) on the south bank of the Rapti, about
+fifty-eight miles north of Ayodya or Oude. There are still the ruins of a great
+town, the name being Sahet Mahat. It was in this town, or in its neighbourhood,
+that Sâkyamuni spent many years of his life after he became Buddha.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(2) There were two Indian kingdoms of this name, a southern and a northern.
+This was the northern, a part of the present Oudh.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(3) In Singhalese, Pase-nadi, meaning &ldquo;leader of the victorious
+army.&rdquo; He was one of the earliest converts and chief patrons of
+Sâkyamuni. Eitel calls him (p. 95) one of the originators of Buddhist
+idolatory, because of the statue which is mentioned in this chapter. See
+Hardy&rsquo;s M. B., pp. 283, 284, et al.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(4) Explained by &ldquo;Path of Love,&rdquo; and &ldquo;Lord of Life.&rdquo;
+Prajapati was aunt and nurse of Sâkyamuni, the first woman admitted to the
+monkhood, and the first superior of the first Buddhistic convent. She is yet to
+become a Buddha.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(5) Sudatta, meaning &ldquo;almsgiver,&rdquo; was the original name of
+Anatha-pindika (or Pindada), a wealthy householder, or Vaisya head, of
+Sravasti, famous for his liberality (Hardy, Anepidu). Of his old house, only
+the well and walls remained at the time of Fâ-Hien&rsquo;s visit to Sravasti.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(6) The Angulimalya were a sect or set of Sivaitic fanatics, who made
+assassination a religious act. The one of them here mentioned had joined them
+by the force of circumstances. Being converted by Buddha, he became a monk; but
+when it is said in the text that he &ldquo;got the Tao,&rdquo; or doctrine, I
+think that expression implies more than his conversion, and is equivalent to
+his becoming an Arhat. His name in Pâli is Angulimala. That he did become an
+Arhat is clear from his autobiographical poem in the &ldquo;Songs of the
+Theras.&rdquo;
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(7) Eitel (p. 37) says:&mdash;&ldquo;A noted vihâra in the suburbs of Sravasti,
+erected in a park which Anatha-pindika bought of prince Jeta, the son of
+Prasenajit. Sâkyamuni made this place his favourite residence for many years.
+Most of the Sûtras (authentic and supposititious) date from this spot.&rdquo;
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(8) See chapter xvii.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(9) See chapter xiii.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(10) Arya, meaning &ldquo;honourable,&rdquo; &ldquo;venerable,&rdquo; is a
+title given only to those who have mastered the four spiritual
+truths:&mdash;(1) that &ldquo;misery&rdquo; is a necessary condition of all
+sentient existence; this is duhkha: (2) that the &ldquo;accumulation&rdquo; of
+misery is caused by the passions; this is samudaya: (3) that the
+&ldquo;extinction&rdquo; of passion is possible; this is nirodha: and (4) that
+the &ldquo;path&rdquo; leads to the extinction of passion; which is marga.
+According to their attainment of these truths, the Aryas, or followers of
+Buddha, are distinguished into four classes,&mdash;Srotapannas, Sakridagamins,
+Anagamins, and Arhats. E. H., p. 14.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(11) This is the first time that Fâ-Hien employs the name Ho-shang {.} {.},
+which is now popularly used in China for all Buddhist monks without distinction
+of rank or office. It is the representative of the Sanskrit term Upadhyaya,
+&ldquo;explained,&rdquo; says Eitel (p. 155) by &ldquo;a self-taught
+teacher,&rdquo; or by &ldquo;he who knows what is sinful and what is not
+sinful,&rdquo; with the note, &ldquo;In India the vernacular of this term is
+{.} {.} (? munshee (? Bronze)); in Kustana and Kashgar they say {.} {.}
+(hwa-shay); and from the latter term are derived the Chinese synonyms, {.} {.}
+(ho-shay) and {.} {.} (ho-shang).&rdquo; The Indian term was originally a
+designation for those who teach only a part of the Vedas, the Vedangas. Adopted
+by Buddhists of Central Asia, it was made to signify the priests of the older
+ritual, in distinction from the Lamas. In China it has been used first as a
+synonym for {.} {.}, monks engaged in popular teaching (teachers of the Law),
+in distinction from {.} {.}, disciplinists, and {.} {.}, contemplative
+philosophers (meditationists); then it was used to designate the abbots of
+monasteries. But it is now popularly applied to all Buddhist monks. In the text
+there seems to be implied some distinction between the &ldquo;teachers&rdquo;
+and the &ldquo;ho-shang;&rdquo;&mdash;probably, the Pâli Akariya and Upagghaya;
+see Sacred Books of the East, vol. xiii, Vinaya Texts, pp. 178, 179.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(12) It might be added, &ldquo;as depending on it,&rdquo; in order to bring out
+the full meaning of the {.} in the text. If I recollect aright, the help of the
+police had to be called in at Hong Kong in its early years, to keep the
+approaches to the Cathedral free from the number of beggars, who squatted down
+there during service, hoping that the hearers would come out with softened
+hearts, and disposed to be charitable. I found the popular tutelary temples in
+Peking and other places, and the path up Mount T&rsquo;ai in Shan-lung
+similarly frequented.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(13) The wife of Anatha-pindika, and who became &ldquo;mother superior&rdquo;
+of many nunneries. See her history in M. B., pp. 220-227. I am surprised it
+does not end with the statement that she is to become a Buddha.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(14) See E. H., p. 136. Hsuan-chwang does not give the name of this murderer;
+see in Julien&rsquo;s &ldquo;Vie et Voyages de Hiouen-thsang,&rdquo; p.
+125,&mdash;&ldquo;a heretical Brahman killed a woman and calumniated
+Buddha.&rdquo; See also the fuller account in Beal&rsquo;s &ldquo;Records of
+Western Countries,&rdquo; pp. 7, 8, where the murder is committed by several
+Brahmacharins. In this passage Beal makes Sundari to be the name of the
+murdered person (a harlot). But the text cannot be so construed.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(15) Eitel (p. 144) calls her Chancha; in Singhalese, Chinchi. See the story
+about her, M. B., pp. 275-277.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(16) &ldquo;Earth&rsquo;s prison,&rdquo; or &ldquo;one of Earth&rsquo;s
+prisons.&rdquo; It was the Avichi naraka to which she went, the last of the
+eight hot prisons, where the culprits die, and are born again in uninterrupted
+succession (such being the meaning of Avichi), though not without hope of final
+redemption. E. H. p. 21.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(17) Devadatta was brother of Ananda, and a near relative therefore of
+Sâkyamuni. He was the deadly enemy, however, of the latter. He had become so in
+an earlier state of existence, and the hatred continued in every successive
+birth, through which they reappeared in the world. See the accounts of him, and
+of his various devices against Buddha, and his own destruction at the last, in
+M. B., pp. 315-321, 326-330; and still better, in the Sacred Books of the East,
+vol. xx, Vinaya Texts, pp. 233-265. For the particular attempt referred to in
+the text, see &ldquo;The Life of the Buddha,&rdquo; p. 107. When he was
+engulphed, and the flames were around him, he cried out to Buddha to save him,
+and we are told that he is expected yet to appear as a Buddha under the name of
+Devaraja, in a universe called Deva-soppana. E. H., p. 39.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(18) &ldquo;A devalaya ({.} {.} or {.} {.}), a place in which a deva is
+worshipped,&mdash;a general name for all Brahmanical temples&rdquo; (Eitel, p.
+30). We read in the Khang-hsi dictionary under {.}, that when Kasyapa Matanga
+came to the Western Regions, with his Classics or Sûtras, he was lodged in the
+Court of State-Ceremonial, and that afterwards there was built for him
+&ldquo;The Court of the White-horse&rdquo; ({.} {.} {.}), and in consequence
+the name of Sze {.} came to be given to all Buddhistic temples. Fâ-Hien,
+however, applies this term only to Brahmanical temples.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(19) Their speech was somewhat unconnected, but natural enough in the
+circumstances. Compare the whole account with the narrative in I Samuel v.
+about the Ark and Dagon, that &ldquo;twice-battered god of Palestine.&rdquo;
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(20) &ldquo;Entered the doctrine or path.&rdquo; Three stages in the Buddhistic
+life are indicated by Fâ-Hien:&mdash;&ldquo;entering it,&rdquo; as here, by
+becoming monks ({.} {.}); &ldquo;getting it,&rdquo; by becoming Arhats ({.}
+{.}); and &ldquo;completing it,&rdquo; by becoming Buddha ({.} {.}).
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(21) It is not quite clear whether the author had in mind here Central India as
+a whole, which I think he had, or only Kosala, the part of it where he then
+was. In the older teaching, there were only thirty-two sects, but there may
+have been three subdivisions of each. See Rhys Davids&rsquo;
+&ldquo;Buddhism,&rdquo; pp. 98, 99.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(22) This mention of &ldquo;the future world&rdquo; is an important difference
+between the Corean and Chinese texts. The want of it in the latter has been a
+stumbling-block in the way of all previous translators. Rémusat says in a note
+that &ldquo;the heretics limited themselves to speak of the duties of man in
+his actual life without connecting it by the notion that the metempsychosis
+with the anterior periods of existence through which he had passed.&rdquo; But
+this is just the opposite of what Fâ-Hien&rsquo;s meaning was, according to
+our Corean text. The notion of &ldquo;the metempsychosis&rdquo; was just that
+in which all the ninety-six erroneous systems agreed among themselves and with
+Buddhism. If he had wished to say what the French sinologue thinks he does say,
+moreover, he would probably have written {.} {.} {.} {.} {.}. Let me add,
+however, that the connexion which Buddhism holds between the past world
+(including the present) and the future is not that of a metempsychosis, or
+transmigration of souls, for it does not appear to admit any separate existence
+of the soul. Adhering to its own phraseology of &ldquo;the wheel,&rdquo; I
+would call its doctrine that of &ldquo;The Transrotation of Births.&rdquo; See
+Rhys Davids&rsquo; third Hibbert Lecture.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(23) Or, more according to the phonetisation of the text, Vaidurya. He was king
+of Kosala, the son and successor of Prasenajit, and the destroyer of
+Kapilavastu, the city of the Sakya family. His hostility to the Sakyas is
+sufficiently established, and it may be considered as certain that the name
+Shay-e, which, according to Julien&rsquo;s &ldquo;Methode,&rdquo; p. 89, may be
+read Chia-e, is the same as Kia-e ({.} {.}), one of the phonetisations of
+Kapilavastu, as given by Eitel.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(24) This would be the interview in the &ldquo;Life of the Buddha&rdquo; in
+Trübner&rsquo;s Oriental Series, p. 116, when Virudhaha on his march found
+Buddha under an old sakotato tree. It afforded him no shade; but he told the
+king that the thought of the danger of &ldquo;his relatives and kindred made it
+shady.&rdquo; The king was moved to sympathy for the time, and went back to
+Sravasti; but the destruction of Kapilavastu was only postponed for a short
+space, and Buddha himself acknowledged it to be inevitable in the connexion of
+cause and effect.
+</p>
+
+</div><!--end chapter-->
+
+<div class="chapter">
+
+<h2><a name="chap21"></a>CHAPTER XXI.<br />
+THE THREE PREDECESSORS OF SAKYAMUNI IN THE BUDDHASHIP.</h2>
+
+<p>
+Fifty le to the west of the city bring (the traveller) to a town named
+Too-wei,(1) the birthplace of Kasyapa Buddha.(1) At the place where he and his
+father met,(2) and at that where he attained to pari-nirvâna, topes were
+erected. Over the entire relic of the whole body of him, the Kasyapa
+Tathagata,(3) a great tope was also erected.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+Going on south-east from the city of Sravasti for twelve yojanas, (the
+travellers) came to a town named Na-pei-kea,(4) the birthplace of Krakuchanda
+Buddha. At the place where he and his father met, and at that where he attained
+to pari-nirvâna, topes were erected. Going north from here less than a yojana,
+they came to a town which had been the birthplace of Kanakamuni Buddha. At the
+place where he and his father met, and where he attained to pari-nirvâna, topes
+were erected.
+</p>
+
+<p class="center">
+NOTES
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(1) Identified, as Beal says, by Cunningham with Tadwa, a village nine miles to
+the west of Sahara-mahat. The birthplace of Kasyapa Buddha is generally thought
+to have been Benares. According to a calculation of Rémusat, from his birth to
+A.D. 1832 there were 1,992,859 years!
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(2) It seems to be necessary to have a meeting between every Buddha and his
+father. One at least is ascribed to Sâkyamuni and his father (real or supposed)
+Suddhodana.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(3) This is the highest epithet given to every supreme Buddha; in Chinese {.}
+{.}, meaning, as Eitel, p. 147 says, &ldquo;<i>Sic profectus sum</i>.&rdquo; It
+is equivalent to &ldquo;Rightful Buddha, the true successor in the Supreme
+Buddha Line.&rdquo; Hardy concludes his account of the Kasyapa Buddha (M. B.,
+p. 97) with the following sentence:&mdash;&ldquo;After his body was burnt, the
+bones still remained in their usual position, presenting the appearance of a
+perfect skeleton; and the whole of the inhabitants of Jambudvipa, assembling
+together, erected a dagoba over his relics one yojana in height!&rdquo;
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(4) Na-pei-kea or Nabhiga is not mentioned elsewhere. Eitel says this Buddha
+was born at the city of Gan-ho ({.} {.} {.}) and Hardy gives his birthplace as
+Mekhala. It may be possible, by means of Sanskrit, to reconcile these
+statements.
+</p>
+
+</div><!--end chapter-->
+
+<div class="chapter">
+
+<h2><a name="chap22"></a>CHAPTER XXII.<br />
+KAPILAVASTU. ITS DESOLATION. LEGENDS OF BUDDHA&rsquo;S BIRTH, AND OTHER
+INCIDENTS IN CONNEXION WITH IT.</h2>
+
+<p>
+Less than a yojana to the east from this brought them to the city of
+Kapilavastu;(1) but in it there was neither king nor people. All was mound and
+desolation. Of inhabitants there were only some monks and a score or two of
+families of the common people. At the spot where stood the old palace of king
+Suddhodana(2) there have been made images of the prince (his eldest son) and
+his mother;(3) and at the places where that son appeared mounted on a white
+elephant when he entered his mother&rsquo;s womb,(4) and where he turned his
+carriage round on seeing the sick man after he had gone out of the city by the
+eastern gate,(5) topes have been erected. The places (were also pointed out)(6)
+where (the rishi) A-e(7) inspected the marks (of Buddhaship on the body) of the
+heir-apparent (when an infant); where, when he was in company with Nanda and
+others, on the elephant being struck down and drawn to one side, he tossed it
+away;(8) where he shot an arrow to the south-east, and it went a distance of
+thirty le, then entering the ground and making a spring to come forth, which
+men subsequently fashioned into a well from which travellers might drink;(9)
+where, after he had attained to Wisdom, Buddha returned and saw the king, his
+father;(10) where five hundred Sakyas quitted their families and did reverence
+to Upali(11) while the earth shook and moved in six different ways; where
+Buddha preached his Law to the devas, and the four deva kings and others kept
+the four doors (of the hall), so that (even) the king, his father, could not
+enter;(12) where Buddha sat under a nyagrodha tree, which is still
+standing,(13) with his face to the east, and (his aunt) Maja-prajapati
+presented him with a Sanghali;(14) and (where) king Vaidurya slew the seed of
+Sakya, and they all in dying became Srotapannas.(15) A tope was erected at this
+last place, which is still existing.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+Several le north-east from the city was the king&rsquo;s field, where the
+heir-apparent sat under a tree, and looked at the ploughers.(16)
+</p>
+
+<p>
+Fifty le east from the city was a garden, named Lumbini,(17) where the queen
+entered the pond and bathed. Having come forth from the pond on the northern
+bank, after (walking) twenty paces, she lifted up her hand, laid hold of a
+branch of a tree, and, with her face to the east, gave birth to the
+heir-apparent.(18) When he fell to the ground, he (immediately) walked seven
+paces. Two dragon-kings (appeared) and washed his body. At the place where they
+did so, there was immediately formed a well, and from it, as well as from the
+above pond, where (the queen) bathed,(19) the monks (even) now constantly take
+the water, and drink it.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+There are four places of regular and fixed occurrence (in the history of) all
+Buddhas:&mdash;first, the place where they attained to perfect Wisdom (and
+became Buddha); second, the place where they turned the wheel of the Law;(20)
+third, the place where they preached the Law, discoursed of righteousness, and
+discomfited (the advocates of) erroneous doctrines; and fourth, the place where
+they came down, after going up to the Trayatrimsas heaven to preach the Law for
+the benefit of their mothers. Other places in connexion with them became
+remarkable, according to the manifestations which were made at them at
+particular times.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+The country of Kapilavastu is a great scene of empty desolation. The
+inhabitants are few and far between. On the roads people have to be on their
+guard against white elephants(21) and lions, and should not travel
+incautiously.
+</p>
+
+<p class="center">
+NOTES
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(1) Kapilavastu, &ldquo;the city of beautiful virtue,&rdquo; was the birthplace
+of Sâkyamuni, but was destroyed, as intimated in the notes on last chapter,
+during his lifetime. It was situated a short distance north-west of the present
+Goruckpoor, lat. 26° 46&#x2032; N., lon. 83° 19&#x2032; E. Davids says (Manual,
+p. 25), &ldquo;It was on the banks of the river Rohini, the modern Kohana,
+about 100 miles north-west of the city of Benares.&rdquo;
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(2) The father, or supposed father, of Sâkyamuni. He is here called &ldquo;the
+king white and pure&rdquo; ({.} {.} {.}). A more common appellation is
+&ldquo;the king of pure rice&rdquo; ({.} {.} {.}); but the character {.}, or
+&ldquo;rice,&rdquo; must be a mistake for {.}, &ldquo;Brahman,&rdquo; and the
+appellation= &ldquo;Pure Brahman king.&rdquo;
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(3) The &ldquo;eldest son,&rdquo; or &ldquo;prince&rdquo; was Sâkyamuni, and
+his mother had no other son. For &ldquo;his mother,&rdquo; see chap. xvii, note
+3. She was a daughter of Anjana or Anusakya, king of the neighbouring country
+of Koli, and Yasodhara, an aunt of Suddhodana. There appear to have been
+various intermarriages between the royal houses of Kapila and Koli.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(4) In &ldquo;The Life of the Buddha,&rdquo; p. 15, we read that &ldquo;Buddha
+was now in the Tushita heaven, and knowing that his time was come (the time for
+his last rebirth in the course of which he would become Buddha), he made the
+necessary examinations; and having decided that Maha-maya was the right mother,
+in the midnight watch he entered her womb under the appearance of an
+elephant.&rdquo; See M. B., pp. 140-143, and, still better, Rhys Davids&rsquo;
+&ldquo;Birth Stories,&rdquo; pp. 58-63.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(5) In Hardy&rsquo;s M. B., pp. 154, 155, we read, &ldquo;As the prince
+(Siddhartha, the first name given to Sâkyamuni; see Eitel, under
+Sarvarthasiddha) was one day passing along, he saw a deva under the appearance
+of a leper, full of sores, with a body like a water-vessel, and legs like the
+pestle for pounding rice; and when he learned from his charioteer what it was
+that he saw, he became agitated, and returned at once to the palace.&rdquo; See
+also Rhys Davids&rsquo; &ldquo;Buddhism,&rdquo; p. 29.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(6) This is an addition of my own, instead of &ldquo;There are also topes
+erected at the following spots,&rdquo; of former translators. Fâ-Hien does not
+say that there were memorial topes at all these places.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(7) Asita; see Eitel, p. 15. He is called in Pâli Kala Devala, and had been a
+minister of Suddhodana&rsquo;s father.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(8) In &ldquo;The Life of Buddha&rdquo; we read that the Lichchhavis of Vaisali
+had sent to the young prince a very fine elephant; but when it was near
+Kapilavastu, Devadatta, out of envy, killed it with a blow of his fist. Nanda
+(not Ananda, but a half-brother of Siddhartha), coming that way, saw the
+carcase lying on the road, and pulled it on one side; but the Bodhisattva,
+seeing it there, took it by the tail, and tossed it over seven fences and
+ditches, when the force of its fall made a great ditch. I suspect that the
+characters in the column have been disarranged, and that we should read {.} {.}
+{.} {.}, {.} {.}, {.} {.}. Buddha, that is Siddhartha, was at this time only
+ten years old.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(9) The young Sakyas were shooting when the prince thus surpassed them all. He
+was then seventeen.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(10) This was not the night when he finally fled from Kapilavastu, and as he
+was leaving the palace, perceiving his sleeping father, and said,
+&ldquo;Father, though I love thee, yet a fear possesses me, and I may not
+stay;&rdquo;&mdash;The Life of the Buddha, p. 25. Most probably it was that
+related in M. B., pp. 199-204. See &ldquo;Buddhist Birth Stories,&rdquo; pp.
+120-127.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(11) They did this, I suppose, to show their humility, for Upali was only a
+Sudra by birth, and had been a barber; so from the first did Buddhism assert
+its superiority to the conditions of rank and caste. Upali was distinguished by
+his knowledge of the rules of discipline, and praised on that account by
+Buddha. He was one of the three leaders of the first synod, and the principal
+compiler of the original Vinaya books.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(12) I have not met with the particulars of this preaching.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(13) Meaning, as explained in Chinese, &ldquo;a tree without knots;&rdquo; the
+<i>ficus Indica</i>. See Rhys Davids&rsquo; note, Manual, p. 39, where he says
+that a branch of one of these trees was taken from Buddha Gaya to Anuradhapura
+in Ceylon in the middle of the third century B.C, and is still growing there,
+the oldest historical tree in the world.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(14) See chap. xiii, note 11. I have not met with the account of this
+presentation. See the long account of Prajapati in M. B., pp. 306-315.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(15) See chap. xx, note 10. The Srotapannas are the first class of saints, who
+are not to be reborn in a lower sphere, but attain to nirvâna after having been
+reborn seven times consecutively as men or devas. The Chinese editions state
+there were &ldquo;1000&rdquo; of the Sakya seed. The general account is that
+they were 500, all maidens, who refused to take their place in king
+Vaidurya&rsquo;s harem, and were in consequence taken to a pond, and had their
+hands and feet cut off. There Buddha came to them, had their wounds dressed,
+and preached to them the Law. They died in the faith, and were reborn in the
+region of the four Great Kings. Thence they came back and visited Buddha at
+Jetavana in the night, and there they obtained the reward of Srotapanna.
+&ldquo;The Life of the Buddha,&rdquo; p. 121.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(16) See the account of this event in M. B., p. 150. The account of it reminds
+me of the ploughing by the sovereign, which has been an institution in China
+from the earliest times. But there we have no magic and no extravagance.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(17) &ldquo;The place of Liberation;&rdquo; see chap. xiii, note 7.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(18) See the accounts of this event in M. B., pp. 145, 146; &ldquo;The Life of
+the Buddha,&rdquo; pp. 15, 16; and &ldquo;Buddhist Birth Stories,&rdquo; p. 66.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(19) There is difficulty in construing the text of this last statement. Mr.
+Beal had, no doubt inadvertently, omitted it in his first translation. In his
+revised version he gives for it, I cannot say happily, &ldquo;As well as at the
+pool, the water of which came down from above for washing (the child).&rdquo;
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(20) See chap. xvii, note 8. See also Davids&rsquo; Manual, p. 45. The latter
+says, that &ldquo;to turn the wheel of the Law&rdquo; means &ldquo;to set
+rolling the royal chariot wheel of a universal empire of truth and
+righteousness;&rdquo; but he admits that this is more grandiloquent than the
+phraseology was in the ears of Buddhists. I prefer the words quoted from Eitel
+in the note referred to. &ldquo;They turned&rdquo; is probably equivalent to
+&ldquo;They began to turn.&rdquo;
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(21) Fâ-Hien does not say that he himself saw any of these white elephants,
+nor does he speak of the lions as of any particular colour. We shall find
+by-and-by, in a note further on, that, to make them appear more terrible, they
+are spoken of as &ldquo;black.&rdquo;
+</p>
+
+</div><!--end chapter-->
+
+<div class="chapter">
+
+<h2><a name="chap23"></a>CHAPTER XXIII.<br />
+RAMA, AND ITS TOPE.</h2>
+
+<p>
+East from Buddha&rsquo;s birthplace, and at a distance of five yojanas, there
+is a kingdom called Rama.(1) The king of this country, having obtained one
+portion of the relics of Buddha&rsquo;s body,(2) returned with it and built
+over it a tope, named the Rama tope. By the side of it there was a pool, and in
+the pool a dragon, which constantly kept watch over (the tope), and presented
+offerings to it day and night. When king Asoka came forth into the world, he
+wished to destroy the eight topes (over the relics), and to build (instead of
+them) 84,000 topes.(3) After he had thrown down the seven (others), he wished
+next to destroy this tope. But then the dragon showed itself, took the king
+into its palace;(4) and when he had seen all the things provided for offerings,
+it said to him, &ldquo;If you are able with your offerings to exceed these, you
+can destroy the tope, and take it all away. I will not contend with you.&rdquo;
+The king, however, knew that such appliances for offerings were not to be had
+anywhere in the world, and thereupon returned (without carrying out his
+purpose).
+</p>
+
+<p>
+(Afterwards), the ground all about became overgrown with vegetation, and there
+was nobody to sprinkle and sweep (about the tope); but a herd of elephants came
+regularly, which brought water with their trunks to water the ground, and
+various kinds of flowers and incense, which they presented at the tope. (Once)
+there came from one of the kingdoms a devotee(5) to worship at the tope. When
+he encountered the elephants he was greatly alarmed, and screened himself among
+the trees; but when he saw them go through with the offerings in the most
+proper manner, the thought filled him with great sadness&mdash;that there
+should be no monastery here, (the inmates of which) might serve the tope, but
+the elephants have to do the watering and sweeping. Forthwith he gave up the
+great prohibitions (by which he was bound),(6) and resumed the status of a
+Sramanera.(7) With his own hands he cleared away the grass and trees, put the
+place in good order, and made it pure and clean. By the power of his
+exhortations, he prevailed on the king of the country to form a residence for
+monks; and when that was done, he became head of the monastery. At the present
+day there are monks residing in it. This event is of recent occurrence; but in
+all the succession from that time till now, there has always been a Sramanera
+head of the establishment.
+</p>
+
+<p class="center">
+NOTES
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(1) Rama or Ramagrama, between Kapilavastu and Kusanagara.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(2) See the account of the eightfold division of the relics of Buddha&rsquo;s
+body in the Sacred Books of the East, vol. xi, Buddhist Suttas, pp. 133-136.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(3) The bones of the human body are supposed to consist of 84,000 atoms, and
+hence the legend of Asoka&rsquo;s wish to build 84,000 topes, one over each
+atom of Sâkyamuni&rsquo;s skeleton.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(4) Fâ-Hien, it appears to me, intended his readers to understand that the
+naga-guardian had a palace of his own, inside or underneath the pool or tank.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(5) It stands out on the narrative as a whole that we have not here &ldquo;some
+pilgrims,&rdquo; but one devotee.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(6) What the &ldquo;great prohibitions&rdquo; which the devotee now gave up
+were we cannot tell. Being what he was, a monk of more than ordinary ascetical
+habits, he may have undertaken peculiar and difficult vows.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(7) The Sramanera, or in Chinese Shamei. See chap. xvi, note 19.
+</p>
+
+</div><!--end chapter-->
+
+<div class="chapter">
+
+<h2><a name="chap24"></a>CHAPTER XXIV.<br />
+WHERE BUDDHA FINALLY RENOUNCED THE WORLD, AND WHERE HE DIED.</h2>
+
+<p>
+East from here four yojanas, there is the place where the heir-apparent sent
+back Chandaka, with his white horse;(1) and there also a tope was erected.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+Four yojanas to the east from this, (the travellers) came to the Charcoal
+tope,(2) where there is also a monastery.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+Going on twelve yojanas, still to the east, they came to the city of
+Kusanagara,(3) on the north of which, between two trees,(4) on the bank of the
+Nairanjana(5) river, is the place where the World-honoured one, with his head
+to the north, attained to pari-nirvâna (and died). There also are the places
+where Subhadra,(6) the last (of his converts), attained to Wisdom (and became
+an Arhat); where in his coffin of gold they made offerings to the
+World-honoured one for seven days,(7) where the Vajrapani laid aside his golden
+club,(8) and where the eight kings(9) divided the relics (of the burnt
+body):&mdash;at all these places were built topes and monasteries, all of which
+are now existing.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+In the city the inhabitants are few and far between, comprising only the
+families belonging to the (different) societies of monks.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+Going from this to the south-east for twelve yojanas, they came to the place
+where the Lichchhavis(10) wished to follow Buddha to (the place of) his
+pari-nirvâna, and where, when he would not listen to them and they kept
+cleaving to him, unwilling to go away, he made to appear a large and deep ditch
+which they could not cross over, and gave them his alms-bowl, as a pledge of
+his regard, (thus) sending them back to their families. There a stone pillar
+was erected with an account of this event engraved upon it.
+</p>
+
+<p class="center">
+NOTES
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(1) This was on the night when Sâkyamuni finally left his palace and family to
+fulfil the course to which he felt that he was called. Chandaka, in Pâli
+Channa, was the prince&rsquo;s charioteer, and in sympathy with him. So also
+was the white horse Kanthaka (Kanthakanam Asvaraja), which neighed his delight
+till the devas heard him. See M. B., pp. 158-161, and Davids&rsquo; Manual, pp.
+32, 33. According to &ldquo;Buddhist Birth Stories,&rdquo; p. 87, the noble
+horse never returned to the city, but died of grief at being left by his
+master, to be reborn immediately in the Trayastrimsas heaven as the deva
+Kanthaka!
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(2) Beal and Giles call this the &ldquo;Ashes&rdquo; tope. I also would have
+preferred to call it so; but the Chinese character is {.}, not {.}. Rémusat has
+&ldquo;la tour des charbons.&rdquo; It was over the place of Buddha&rsquo;s
+cremation.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(3) In Pâli Kusinara. It got its name from the Kusa grass (the <i>poa
+cynosuroides</i>); and its ruins are still extant, near Kusiah, 180 N.W. from
+Patna; &ldquo;about,&rdquo; says Davids, &ldquo;120 miles N.N.E. of Benares,
+and 80 miles due east of Kapilavastu.&rdquo;
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(4) The Sala tree, the <i>Shorea robusta</i>, which yields the famous teak
+wood.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(5) Confounded, according to Eitel, even by Hsuan-chwang, with the Hiranyavati,
+which flows past the city on the south.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(6) A Brahman of Benares, said to have been 120 years old, who came to learn
+from Buddha the very night he died. Ananda would have repulsed him; but Buddha
+ordered him to be introduced; and then putting aside the ingenious but
+unimportant question which he propounded, preached to him the Law. The Brahman
+was converted and attained at once to Arhatship. Eitel says that he attained to
+nirvâna a few moments before Sâkyamuni; but see the full account of him and his
+conversion in &ldquo;Buddhist Suttas,&rdquo; p. 103-110.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(7) Thus treating the dead Buddha as if he had been a Chakravartti king.
+Hardy&rsquo;s M. B., p. 347, says:&mdash;&ldquo;For the place of cremation, the
+princes (of Kusinara) offered their own coronation-hall, which was decorated
+with the utmost magnificence, and the body was deposited in a golden
+sarcophagus.&rdquo; See the account of a cremation which Fâ-Hien witnessed in
+Ceylon, chap. xxxix.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(8) The name Vajrapani is explained as &ldquo;he who holds in his hand the
+diamond club (or pestle=sceptre),&rdquo; which is one of the many names of
+Indra or Sakra. He therefore, that great protector of Buddhism, would seem to
+be intended here; but the difficulty with me is that neither in Hardy nor
+Rockhill, nor any other writer, have I met with any manifestation of himself
+made by Indra on this occasion. The princes of Kusanagara were called mallas,
+&ldquo;strong or mighty heroes;&rdquo; so also were those of Pava and Vaisali;
+and a question arises whether the language may not refer to some story which
+Fâ-Hien had heard,&mdash;something which they did on this great occasion.
+Vajrapani is also explained as meaning &ldquo;the diamond mighty hero;&rdquo;
+but the epithet of &ldquo;diamond&rdquo; is not so applicable to them as to
+Indra. The clause may hereafter obtain more elucidation.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(9) Of Kusanagara, Pava, Vaisali, and other kingdoms. Kings, princes,
+brahmans,&mdash;each wanted the whole relic; but they agreed to an eightfold
+division at the suggestion of the brahman Drona.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(10) These &ldquo;strong heroes&rdquo; were the chiefs of Vaisali, a kingdom
+and city, with an oligarchical constitution. They embraced Buddhism early, and
+were noted for their peculiar attachment to Buddha. The second synod was held
+at Vaisali, as related in the next chapter. The ruins of the city still exist
+at Bassahar, north of Patna, the same, I suppose, as Besarh, twenty miles north
+of Hajipur. See Beal&rsquo;s Revised Version, p. lii.
+</p>
+
+</div><!--end chapter-->
+
+<div class="chapter">
+
+<h2><a name="chap25"></a>CHAPTER XXV.<br />
+VAISALI. THE TOPE CALLED &ldquo;WEAPONS LAID DOWN.&rdquo; THE COUNCIL OF
+VAISALI.</h2>
+
+<p>
+East from this city ten yojanas, (the travellers) came to the kingdom of
+Vaisali. North of the city so named is a large forest, having in it the
+double-galleried vihâra(1) where Buddha dwelt, and the tope over half the body
+of Ananda.(2) Inside the city the woman Ambapali(3) built a vihâra in honour of
+Buddha, which is now standing as it was at first. Three le south of the city,
+on the west of the road, (is the) garden (which) the same Ambapali presented to
+Buddha, in which he might reside. When Buddha was about to attain to his
+pari-nirvâna, as he was quitting the city by the west gate, he turned round,
+and, beholding the city on his right, said to them, &ldquo;Here I have taken my
+last walk.&rdquo;(4) Men subsequently built a tope at this spot.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+Three le north-west of the city there is a tope called, &ldquo;Bows and weapons
+laid down.&rdquo; The reason why it got that name was this:&mdash;The inferior
+wife of a king, whose country lay along the river Ganges, brought forth from
+her womb a ball of flesh. The superior wife, jealous of the other, said,
+&ldquo;You have brought forth a thing of evil omen,&rdquo; and immediately it
+was put into a box of wood and thrown into the river. Farther down the stream
+another king was walking and looking about, when he saw the wooden box
+(floating) in the water. (He had it brought to him), opened it, and found a
+thousand little boys, upright and complete, and each one different from the
+others. He took them and had them brought up. They grew tall and large, and
+very daring, and strong, crushing all opposition in every expedition which they
+undertook. By and by they attacked the kingdom of their real father, who became
+in consequence greatly distressed and sad. His inferior wife asked what it was
+that made him so, and he replied, &ldquo;That king has a thousand sons, daring
+and strong beyond compare, and he wishes with them to attack my kingdom; this
+is what makes me sad.&rdquo; The wife said, &ldquo;You need not be sad and
+sorrowful. Only make a high gallery on the wall of the city on the east; and
+when the thieves come, I shall be able to make them retire.&rdquo; The king did
+as she said; and when the enemies came, she said to them from the tower,
+&ldquo;You are my sons; why are you acting so unnaturally and
+rebelliously?&rdquo; They replied, &ldquo;If you do not believe me,&rdquo; she
+said, &ldquo;look, all of you, towards me, and open your mouths.&rdquo; She
+then pressed her breasts with her two hands, and each sent forth 500 jets of
+milk, which fell into the mouths of the thousand sons. The thieves (thus) knew
+that she was their mother, and laid down their bows and weapons.(5) The two
+kings, the fathers, thereupon fell into reflection, and both got to be Pratyeka
+Buddhas.(6) The tope of the two Pratyeka Buddhas is still existing.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+In a subsequent age, when the World-honoured one had attained to perfect Wisdom
+(and become Buddha), he said to is disciples, &ldquo;This is the place where I
+in a former age laid down my bow and weapons.&rdquo;(7) It was thus that
+subsequently men got to know (the fact), and raised the tope on this spot,
+which in this way received its name. The thousand little boys were the thousand
+Buddhas of this Bhadra-kalpa.(8)
+</p>
+
+<p>
+It was by the side of the &ldquo;Weapons-laid-down&rdquo; tope that Buddha,
+having given up the idea of living longer, said to Ananda, &ldquo;In three
+months from this I will attain to pavi-nirvâna;&rdquo; and king Mara(9) had so
+fascinated and stupefied Ananda, that he was not able to ask Buddha to remain
+longer in this world.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+Three or four le east from this place there is a tope (commemorating the
+following occurrence):&mdash;A hundred years after the pari-nirvâna of Buddha,
+some Bhikshus of Vaisali went wrong in the matter of the disciplinary rules in
+ten particulars, and appealed for their justification to what they said were
+the words of Buddha. Hereupon the Arhats and Bhikshus observant of the rules,
+to the number in all of 700 monks, examined afresh and collated the collection
+of disciplinary books.(10) Subsequently men built at this place the tope (in
+question), which is still existing.
+</p>
+
+<p class="center">
+NOTES
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(1) It is difficult to tell what was the peculiar form of this vihâra from
+which it gets its name; something about the construction of its door, or
+cupboards, or galleries.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(2) See the explanation of this in the next chapter.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(3) Ambapali, Amrapali, or Amradarika, &ldquo;the guardian of the Amra
+(probably the mango) tree,&rdquo; is famous in Buddhist annals. See the account
+of her in M. B., pp. 456-8. She was a courtesan. She had been in many narakas
+or hells, was 100,000 times a female beggar, and 10,000 times a prostitute; but
+maintaining perfect continence during the period of Kasyapa Buddha,
+Sâkyamuni&rsquo;s predecessor, she had been born a devi, and finally appeared
+in earth under an Amra tree in Vaisali. There again she fell into her old ways,
+and had a son by king Bimbisara; but she was won over by Buddha to virtue and
+chastity, renounced the world, and attained to the state of an Arhat. See the
+earliest account of Ambapali&rsquo;s presentation of the garden in
+&ldquo;Buddhist Suttas,&rdquo; pp. 30-33, and the note there from Bishop
+Bigandet on pp. 33, 34.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(4) Beal gives, &ldquo;In this place I have performed the last religious act of
+my earthly career;&rdquo; Giles, &ldquo;This is the last place I shall
+visit;&rdquo; Rémusat, &ldquo;C&rsquo;est un lieu ou je reviendrai bien
+longtemps apres ceci.&rdquo; Perhaps the &ldquo;walk&rdquo; to which Buddha
+referred had been for meditation.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(5) See the account of this legend in the note in M. B., pp. 235, 236,
+different, but not less absurd. The first part of Fâ-Hien&rsquo;s narrative
+will have sent the thoughts of some of my readers to the exposure of the infant
+Moses, as related in Exodus.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(6) See chap. xiii, note 14.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(7) Thus Sâkyamuni had been one of the thousand little boys who floated in the
+box in the Ganges. How long back the former age was we cannot tell. I suppose
+the tope of the two fathers who became Pratyeka Buddhas had been built like the
+one commemorating the laying down of weapons after Buddha had told his
+disciples of the strange events in the past.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(8) Bhadra-kalpa, &ldquo;the Kalpa of worthies or sages.&rdquo;
+&ldquo;This,&rdquo; says Eitel, p. 22, &ldquo;is a designation for a Kalpa of
+stability, so called because 1000 Buddhas appear in the course of it. Our
+present period is a Bhadra-kalpa, and four Buddhas have already appeared. It is
+to last 236 million years, but over 151 millions have already elapsed.&rdquo;
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(9) &ldquo;The king of demons.&rdquo; The name Mara is explained by &ldquo;the
+murderer,&rdquo; &ldquo;the destroyer of virtue,&rdquo; and similar
+appellations. &ldquo;He is,&rdquo; says Eitel, &ldquo;the personification of
+lust, the god of love, sin, and death, the arch-enemy of goodness, residing in
+the heaven Paranirmita Vasavartin on the top of the Kamadhatu. He assumes
+different forms, especially monstrous ones, to tempt or frighten the saints, or
+sends his daughters, or inspires wicked men like Devadatta or the Nirgranthas
+to do his work. He is often represented with 100 arms, and riding on an
+elephant.&rdquo; The oldest form of the legend in this paragraph is in
+&ldquo;Buddhist Suttas,&rdquo; Sacred Books of the East, vol. xi, pp. 41-55,
+where Buddha says that, if Ananda had asked him thrice, he would have postponed
+his death.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(10) Or the Vinaya-pitaka. The meeting referred to was an important one, and is
+generally spoken of as the second Great Council of the Buddhist Church. See, on
+the formation of the Buddhist Canon, Hardy&rsquo;s E. M., chap. xviii, and the
+last chapter of Davids&rsquo; Manual, on the History of the Order. The first
+Council was that held at Rajagriha, shortly after Buddha&rsquo;s death, under
+the presidency of Kasyapa;&mdash;say about B.C. 410. The second was that spoken
+of here;&mdash;say about B.C. 300. In Davids&rsquo; Manual (p. 216) we find the
+ten points of discipline, in which the heretics (I can use that term here)
+claimed at least indulgence. Two meetings were held to consider and discuss
+them. At the former the orthodox party barely succeeded in carrying their
+condemnation of the laxer monks; and a second and larger meeting, of which
+Fâ-Hien speaks, was held in consequence, and a more emphatic condemnation
+passed. At the same time all the books and subjects of discipline seem to have
+undergone a careful revision.<br />
+    The Corean text is clearer than the Chinese as to those who composed the
+Council,&mdash;the Arhats and orthodox monks. The leader among them was a
+Yasas, or Yasada, or Yedsaputtra, who had been a disciple of Ananda, and must
+therefore have been a very old man.
+</p>
+
+</div><!--end chapter-->
+
+<div class="chapter">
+
+<h2><a name="chap26"></a>CHAPTER XXVI.<br />
+REMARKABLE DEATH OF ANANDA.</h2>
+
+<p>
+Four yojanas on from this place to the east brought the travellers to the
+confluence of the five rivers.(1) When Ananda was going from Magadha(2) to
+Vaisali, wishing his pari-nirvâna to take place (there), the devas informed
+king Ajatasatru(3) of it, and the king immediately pursued him, in his own
+grand carriage, with a body of soldiers, and had reached the river. (On the
+other hand), the Lichchhavis of Vaisali had heard that Ananda was coming (to
+their city), and they on their part came to meet him. (In this way), they all
+arrived together at the river, and Ananda considered that, if he went forward,
+king Ajatasatru would be very angry, while, if he went back, the Lichchhavis
+would resent his conduct. He thereupon in the very middle of the river burnt
+his body in a fiery ecstasy of Samadhi,(4) and his pari-nirvâna was attained.
+He divided his body (also) into two, (leaving) the half of it on each bank; so
+that each of the two kings got one half as a (sacred) relic, and took it back
+(to his own capital), and there raised a tope over it.
+</p>
+
+<p class="center">
+NOTES
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(1) This spot does not appear to have been identified. It could not be far from
+Patna.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(2) Magadha was for some time the headquarters of Buddhism; the holy land,
+covered with vihâras; a fact perpetuated, as has been observed in a previous
+note, in the name of the present Behar, the southern portion of which
+corresponds to the ancient kingdom of Magadha.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(3) In Singhalese, Ajasat. See the account of his conversion in M. B., pp.
+321-326. He was the son of king Bimbisara, who was one of the first royal
+converts to Buddhism. Ajasat murdered his father, or at least wrought his
+death; and was at first opposed to Sâkyamuni, and a favourer of Devadatta. When
+converted, he became famous for his liberality in almsgiving.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(4) Eitel has a long article (pp. 114, 115) on the meaning of Samadhi, which is
+one of the seven sections of wisdom (bodhyanga). Hardy defines it as meaning
+&ldquo;perfect tranquillity;&rdquo; Turnour, as &ldquo;meditative
+abstraction;&rdquo; Burnouf, as &ldquo;self-control;&rdquo; and Edkins, as
+&ldquo;ecstatic reverie.&rdquo; &ldquo;Samadhi,&rdquo; says Eitel,
+&ldquo;signifies the highest pitch of abstract, ecstatic meditation; a state of
+absolute indifference to all influences from within or without; a state of
+torpor of both the material and spiritual forces of vitality; a sort of
+terrestrial nirvâna, consistently culminating in total destruction of
+life.&rdquo; He then quotes apparently the language of the text, &ldquo;He
+consumed his body by Agni (the fire of) Samadhi,&rdquo; and says it is &ldquo;a
+common expression for the effects of such ecstatic, ultra-mystic
+self-annihilation.&rdquo; All this is simply &ldquo;a darkening of counsel by
+words without knowledge.&rdquo; Some facts concerning the death of Ananda are
+hidden beneath the darkness of the phraseology, which it is impossible for us
+to ascertain. By or in Samadhi he burns his body in the very middle of the
+river, and then he divides the relic of the burnt body into two parts (for so
+evidently Fâ-Hien intended his narration to be taken), and leaves one half on
+each bank. The account of Ananda&rsquo;s death in Nien-ch&rsquo;ang&rsquo;s
+&ldquo;History of Buddha and the Patriarchs&rdquo; is much more extravagant.
+Crowds of men and devas are brought together to witness it. The body is divided
+into four parts. One is conveyed to the Tushita heaven; a second, to the palace
+of a certain Naga king; a third is given to Ajatasatru; and the fourth to the
+Lichchhavis. What it all really means I cannot tell.
+</p>
+
+</div><!--end chapter-->
+
+<div class="chapter">
+
+<h2><a name="chap27"></a>CHAPTER XXVII.<br />
+PATALIPUTTRA OR PATNA, IN MAGADHA. KING ASOKA&rsquo;S SPIRIT-BUILT PALACE AND
+HALLS. THE BUDDHIST BRAHMAN, RADHA-SAMI. DISPENSARIES AND HOSPITALS.</h2>
+
+<p>
+Having crossed the river, and descended south for a yojana, (the travellers)
+came to the town of Pataliputtra,(1) in the kingdom of Magadha, the city where
+king Asoka(2) ruled. The royal palace and halls in the midst of the city, which
+exist now as of old, were all made by spirits which he employed, and which
+piled up the stones, reared the walls and gates, and executed the elegant
+carving and inlaid sculpture-work,&mdash;in a way which no human hands of this
+world could accomplish.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+King Asoka had a younger brother who had attained to be an Arhat, and resided
+on Gridhra-kuta(3) hill, finding his delight in solitude and quiet. The king,
+who sincerely reverenced him, wished and begged him (to come and live) in his
+family, where he could supply all his wants. The other, however, through his
+delight in the stillness of the mountain, was unwilling to accept the
+invitation, on which the king said to him, &ldquo;Only accept my invitation,
+and I will make a hill for you inside the city.&rdquo; Accordingly, he provided
+the materials of a feast, called to him the spirits, and announced to them,
+&ldquo;To-morrow you will all receive my invitation; but as there are no mats
+for you to sit on, let each one bring (his own seat).&rdquo; Next day the
+spirits came, each one bringing with him a great rock, (like) a wall, four or
+five paces square, (for a seat). When their sitting was over, the king made
+them form a hill with the large stones piled on one another, and also at the
+foot of the hill, with five large square stones, to make an apartment, which
+might be more than thirty cubits long, twenty cubits wide, and more than ten
+cubits high.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+In this city there had resided a great Brahman,(4) named Radha-sami,(5) a
+professor of the mahayana, of clear discernment and much wisdom, who understood
+everything, living by himself in spotless purity. The king of the country
+honoured and reverenced him, and served him as his teacher. If he went to
+inquire for and greet him, the king did not presume to sit down alongside of
+him; and if, in his love and reverence, he took hold of his hand, as soon as he
+let it go, the Brahman made haste to pour water on it and wash it. He might be
+more than fifty years old, and all the kingdom looked up to him. By means of
+this one man, the Law of Buddha was widely made known, and the followers of
+other doctrines did not find it in their power to persecute the body of monks
+in any way.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+By the side of the tope of Asoka, there has been made a mahayana monastery,
+very grand and beautiful; there is also a hinayana one; the two together
+containing six or seven hundred monks. The rules of demeanour and the
+scholastic arrangements(6) in them are worthy of observation.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+Shamans of the highest virtue from all quarters, and students, inquirers
+wishing to find out truth and the grounds of it, all resort to these
+monasteries. There also resides in this monastery a Brahman teacher, whose name
+also is Manjusri,(7) whom the Shamans of greatest virtue in the kingdom, and
+the mahayana Bhikshus honour and look up to.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+The cities and towns of this country are the greatest of all in the Middle
+Kingdom. The inhabitants are rich and prosperous, and vie with one another in
+the practice of benevolence and righteousness. Every year on the eighth day of
+the second month they celebrate a procession of images. They make a
+four-wheeled car, and on it erect a structure of four storeys by means of
+bamboos tied together. This is supported by a king-post, with poles and lances
+slanting from it, and is rather more than twenty cubits high, having the shape
+of a tope. White and silk-like cloth of hair(8) is wrapped all round it, which
+is then painted in various colours. They make figures of devas, with gold,
+silver, and lapis lazuli grandly blended and having silken streamers and
+canopies hung out over them. On the four sides are niches, with a Buddha seated
+in each, and a Bodhisattva standing in attendance on him. There may be twenty
+cars, all grand and imposing, but each one different from the others. On the
+day mentioned, the monks and laity within the borders all come together; they
+have singers and skilful musicians; they pay their devotion with flowers and
+incense. The Brahmans come and invite the Buddhas to enter the city. These do
+so in order, and remain two nights in it. All through the night they keep lamps
+burning, have skilful music, and present offerings. This is the practice in all
+the other kingdoms as well. The Heads of the Vaisya families in them establish
+in the cities houses for dispensing charity and medicines. All the poor and
+destitute in the country, orphans, widowers, and childless men, maimed people
+and cripples, and all who are diseased, go to those houses, and are provided
+with every kind of help, and doctors examine their diseases. They get the food
+and medicines which their cases require, and are made to feel at ease; and when
+they are better, they go away of themselves.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+When king Asoka destroyed the seven topes, (intending) to make eighty-four
+thousand,(9) the first which he made was the great tope, more than three le to
+the south of this city. In front of this there is a footprint of Buddha, where
+a vihâra has been built. The door of it faces the north, and on the south of it
+there is a stone pillar, fourteen or fifteen cubits in circumference, and more
+than thirty cubits high, on which there is an inscription, saying, &ldquo;Asoka
+gave the jambudvipa to the general body of all the monks, and then redeemed it
+from them with money. This he did three times.&rdquo;(10) North from the tope
+300 or 400 paces, king Asoka built the city of Ne-le.(11) In it there is a
+stone pillar, which also is more than thirty feet high, with a lion on the top
+of it. On the pillar there is an inscription recording the things which led to
+the building of Ne-le, with the number of the year, the day, and the month.
+</p>
+
+<p class="center">
+NOTES
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(1) The modern Patna, lat. 25° 28&#x2032; N., lon. 85° 15&#x2032; E. The
+Sanskrit name means &ldquo;The city of flowers.&rdquo; It is the Indian
+Florence.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(2) See chap. x, note 3. Asoka transferred his court from Rajagriha to
+Pataliputtra, and there, in the eighteenth year of his reign, he convoked the
+third Great Synod,&mdash;according, at least, to southern Buddhism. It must
+have been held a few years before B.C. 250; Eitel says in 246.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(3) &ldquo;The Vulture-hill;&rdquo; so called because Mara, according to
+Buddhist tradition, once assumed the form of a vulture on it to interrupt the
+meditation of Ananda; or, more probably, because it was a resort of vultures.
+It was near Rajagriha, the earlier capital of Asoka, so that Fâ-Hien connects
+a legend of it with his account of Patna. It abounded in caverns, and was
+famous as a resort of ascetics.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(4) A Brahman by cast, but a Buddhist in faith.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(5) So, by the help of Julien&rsquo;s &ldquo;Methode,&rdquo; I transliterate
+the Chinese characters {.} {.} {.} {.}. Beal gives Radhasvami, his Chinese text
+having a {.} between {.} and {.}. I suppose the name was Radhasvami or
+Radhasami.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(6) {.} {.}, the names of two kinds of schools, often occurring in the Li Ki
+and Mencius. Why should there not have been schools in those monasteries in
+India as there were in China? Fâ-Hien himself grew up with other boys in a
+monastery, and no doubt had to &ldquo;go to school.&rdquo; And the next
+sentence shows us there might be schools for more advanced students as well as
+for the Sramaneras.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(7) See chap. xvi, note 22. It is perhaps with reference to the famous
+Bodhisattva that the Brahman here is said to be &ldquo;also&rdquo; named
+Manjusri.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(8) ? Cashmere cloth.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(9) See chap. xxiii, note 3.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(10) We wish that we had more particulars of this great transaction, and that
+we knew what value in money Asoka set on the whole world. It is to be observed
+that he gave it to the monks, and did not receive it from them. Their right was
+from him, and he bought it back. He was the only &ldquo;Power&rdquo; that was.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(11) We know nothing more of Ne-le. It could only have been a small place; an
+outpost for the defence of Pataliputtra.
+</p>
+
+</div><!--end chapter-->
+
+<div class="chapter">
+
+<h2><a name="chap28"></a>CHAPTER XXVIII.<br />
+RAJAGRIHA, NEW AND OLD. LEGENDS AND INCIDENTS CONNECTED WITH IT.</h2>
+
+<p>
+(The travellers) went on from this to the south-east for nine yojanas, and came
+to a small solitary rocky hill,(1) at the head or end of which(2) was an
+apartment of stone, facing the south,&mdash;the place where Buddha sat, when
+Sakra, Ruler of Devas, brought the deva-musician, Pancha-(sikha),(3) to give
+pleasure to him by playing on his lute. Sakra then asked Buddha about forty-two
+subjects, tracing (the questions) out with his finger one by one on the
+rock.(4) The prints of his tracing are still there; and here also there is a
+monastery.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+A yojana south-west from this place brought them to the village of Nala,(5)
+where Sariputtra(6) was born, and to which also he returned, and attained here
+his pari-nirvâna. Over the spot (where his body was burned) there was built a
+tope, which is still in existence.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+Another yojana to the west brought them to New Rajagriha,(7)&mdash;the new city
+which was built by king Ajatasatru. There were two monasteries in it. Three
+hundred paces outside the west gate, king Ajatasatru, having obtained one
+portion of the relics of Buddha, built (over them) a tope, high, large, grand,
+and beautiful. Leaving the city by the south gate, and proceeding south four
+le, one enters a valley, and comes to a circular space formed by five hills,
+which stand all round it, and have the appearance of the suburban wall of a
+city. Here was the old city of king Bimbisara; from east to west about five or
+six le, and from north to south seven or eight. It was here that Sariputtra and
+Maudgalyayana first saw Upasena;(8) that the Nirgrantha(9) made a pit of fire
+and poisoned the rice, and then invited Buddha (to eat with him); that king
+Ajatasatru made a black elephant intoxicated with liquor, wishing him to injure
+Buddha;(10) and that at the north-east corner of the city in a (large) curving
+(space) Jivaka built a vihâra in the garden of Ambapali,(11) and invited Buddha
+with his 1250 disciples to it, that he might there make his offerings to
+support them. (These places) are still there as of old, but inside the city all
+is emptiness and desolation; no man dwells in it.
+</p>
+
+<p class="center">
+NOTES
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(1) Called by Hsuan-chwang Indra-sila-guha, or &ldquo;The cavern of
+Indra.&rdquo; It has been identified with a hill near the village of Giryek, on
+the bank of the Panchana river, about thirty-six miles from Gaya. The hill
+terminates in two peaks overhanging the river, and it is the more northern and
+higher of these which Fâ-Hien had in mind. It bears an oblong terrace covered
+with the ruins of several buildings, especially of a vihâra.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(2) This does not mean the top or summit of the hill, but its
+&ldquo;headland,&rdquo; where it ended at the river.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(3) See the account of this visit of Sakra in M. B., pp. 288-290. It is from
+Hardy that we are able to complete here the name of the musician, which appears
+in Fâ-Hien as only Pancha, or &ldquo;Five.&rdquo; His harp or lute, we are
+told, was &ldquo;twelve miles long.&rdquo;
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(4) Hardy (M. B., pp. 288, 289) makes the subjects only thirteen, which are
+still to be found in one of the Sûtras (&ldquo;the Dik-Sanga, in the
+Sakra-prasna Sutra&rdquo;). Whether it was Sakra who wrote his questions, or
+Buddha who wrote the answers, depends on the punctuation. It seems better to
+make Sakra the writer.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(5) Or Nalanda; identified with the present Baragong. A grand monastery was
+subsequently built at it, famous by the residence for five years of
+Hsuan-chwang.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(6) See chap. xvi, note 11. There is some doubt as to the statement that Nala
+was his birthplace.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(7) The city of &ldquo;Royal Palaces;&rdquo; &ldquo;the residence of the
+Magadha kings from Bimbisara to Asoka, the first metropolis of Buddhism, at the
+foot of the Gridhrakuta mountains. Here the first synod assembled within a year
+after Sâkyamuni&rsquo;s death. Its ruins are still extant at the village of
+Rajghir, sixteen miles S.W. of Behar, and form an object of pilgrimage to the
+Jains (E. H., p. 100).&rdquo; It is called New Rajagriha to distinguish it from
+Kusagarapura, a few miles from it, the old residence of the kings. Eitel says
+it was built by Bimbisara, while Fâ-Hien ascribes it to Ajatasatru. I suppose
+the son finished what the father had begun.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(8) One of the five first followers of Sâkyamuni. He is also called Asvajit; in
+Pâli Assaji; but Asvajit seems to be a military title= &ldquo;Master or trainer
+of horses.&rdquo; The two more famous disciples met him, not to lead him, but
+to be directed by him, to Buddha. See Sacred Books of the East, vol. xiii,
+Vinaya Texts, pp. 144-147.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(9) One of the six Tirthyas (Tirthakas=&ldquo;erroneous teachers;&rdquo; M. B.,
+pp. 290-292, but I have not found the particulars of the attempts on
+Buddha&rsquo;s life referred to by Fâ-Hien), or Brahmanical opponents of
+Buddha. He was an ascetic, one of the Jnati clan, and is therefore called
+Nirgranthajnati. He taught a system of fatalism, condemned the use of clothes,
+and thought he could subdue all passions by fasting. He had a body of
+followers, who called themselves by his name (Eitel, pp. 84, 85), and were the
+forerunners of the Jains.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(10) The king was moved to this by Devadatta. Of course the elephant
+disappointed them, and did homage to Sâkyamuni. See Sacred Books of the East,
+vol. xx, Vinaya Texts, p. 247.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(11) See chap. xxv, note 3. Jivaka was Ambapali&rsquo;s son by king Bimbisara,
+and devoted himself to the practice of medicine. See the account of him in the
+Sacred Books of the East, vol. xvii, Vinaya Texts, pp. 171-194.
+</p>
+
+</div><!--end chapter-->
+
+<div class="chapter">
+
+<h2><a name="chap29"></a>CHAPTER XXIX.<br />
+GRIDHRA-KUTA HILL, AND LEGENDS. FÂ-HIEN PASSES A NIGHT ON IT. HIS REFLECTIONS.
+</h2>
+
+<p>
+Entering the valley, and keeping along the mountains on the south-east, after
+ascending fifteen le, (the travellers) came to mount Gridhra-kuta.(1) Three le
+before you reach the top, there is a cavern in the rocks, facing the south, in
+which Buddha sat in meditation. Thirty paces to the north-west there is
+another, where Ananda was sitting in meditation, when the deva Mara Pisuna,(2)
+having assumed the form of a large vulture, took his place in front of the
+cavern, and frightened the disciple. Then Buddha, by his mysterious,
+supernatural power, made a cleft in the rock, introduced his hand, and stroked
+Ananda&rsquo;s shoulder, so that his fear immediately passed away. The
+footprints of the bird and the cleft for (Buddha&rsquo;s) hand are still there,
+and hence comes the name of &ldquo;The Hill of the Vulture Cavern.&rdquo;
+</p>
+
+<p>
+In front of the cavern there are the places where the four Buddhas sat. There
+are caverns also of the Arhats, one where each sat and meditated, amounting to
+several hundred in all. At the place where in front of his rocky apartment
+Buddha was walking from east to west (in meditation), and Devadatta, from among
+the beetling cliffs on the north of the mountain, threw a rock across, and hurt
+Buddha&rsquo;s toes,(3) the rock is still there.(4)
+</p>
+
+<p>
+The hall where Buddha preached his Law has been destroyed, and only the
+foundations of the brick walls remain. On this hill the peak is beautifully
+green, and rises grandly up; it is the highest of all the five hills. In the
+New City Fâ-Hien bought incense-(sticks), flowers, oil and lamps, and hired
+two bhikshus, long resident (at the place), to carry them (to the peak). When
+he himself got to it, he made his offerings with the flowers and incense, and
+lighted the lamps when the darkness began to come on. He felt melancholy, but
+restrained his tears and said, &ldquo;Here Buddha delivered the Surangama
+(Sutra).(5) I, Fâ-Hien, was born when I could not meet with Buddha; and now I
+only see the footprints which he has left, and the place where he lived, and
+nothing more.&rdquo; With this, in front of the rock cavern, he chanted the
+Surangama Sutra, remained there over the night, and then returned towards the
+New City.(6)
+</p>
+
+<p class="center">
+NOTES
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(1) See chap. xxviii, note 1.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(2) See chap. xxv, note 9. Pisuna is a name given to Mara, and signifies
+&ldquo;sinful lust.&rdquo;
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(3) See M. B., p. 320. Hardy says that Devadatta&rsquo;s attempt was &ldquo;by
+the help of a machine;&rdquo; but the oldest account in the Sacred Books of the
+East, vol. xx, Vinaya Texts, p. 245, agrees with what Fâ-Hien implies that he
+threw the rock with his own arm.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(4) And, as described by Hsuan-chwang, fourteen or fifteen cubits high, and
+thirty paces round.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(5) See Mr. Bunyiu Nanjio&rsquo;s &ldquo;Catalogue of the Chinese Translation
+of the Buddhist Tripitaka,&rdquo; Sutra Pitaka, Nos. 399, 446. It was the
+former of these that came on this occasion to the thoughts and memory of
+Fâ-Hien.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(6) In a note (p. lx) to his revised version of our author, Mr. Beal says,
+&ldquo;There is a full account of this perilous visit of Fâ-Hien, and how he
+was attacked by tigers, in the &lsquo;History of the High
+Priests.&rsquo;&rdquo; But &ldquo;the high priests&rdquo; merely means
+distinguished monks, &ldquo;eminent monks,&rdquo; as Mr. Nanjio exactly renders
+the adjectival character. Nor was Fâ-Hien &ldquo;attacked by tigers&rdquo; on
+the peak. No &ldquo;tigers&rdquo; appear in the Memoir. &ldquo;Two black
+lions&rdquo; indeed crouched before him for a time this night, &ldquo;licking
+their lips and waving their tails;&rdquo; but their appearance was to
+&ldquo;try,&rdquo; and not to attack him; and when they saw him resolute, they
+&ldquo;drooped their heads, put down their tails, and prostrated themselves
+before him.&rdquo; This of course is not an historical account, but a legendary
+tribute to his bold perseverance.
+</p>
+
+</div><!--end chapter-->
+
+<div class="chapter">
+
+<h2><a name="chap30"></a>CHAPTER XXX.<br />
+THE SRATAPARNA CAVE, OR CAVE OF THE FIRST COUNCIL. LEGENDS. SUICIDE OF A
+BHIKSHU.</h2>
+
+<p>
+Out from the old city, after walking over 300 paces, on the west of the road,
+(the travellers) found the Karanda Bamboo garden,(1) where the (old) vihâra is
+still in existence, with a company of monks, who keep (the ground about it)
+swept and watered.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+North of the vihâra two or three le there was the Smasanam, which name means in
+Chinese &ldquo;the field of graves into which the dead are thrown.&rdquo;(2)
+</p>
+
+<p>
+As they kept along the mountain on the south, and went west for 300 paces, they
+found a dwelling among the rocks, named the Pippala cave,(3) in which Buddha
+regularly sat in meditation after taking his (midday) meal.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+Going on still to the west for five or six le, on the north of the hill, in the
+shade, they found the cavern called Srataparna,(4) the place where, after the
+nirvâna(5) of Buddha, 500 Arhats collected the Sûtras. When they brought the
+Sûtras forth, three lofty seats(6) had been prepared and grandly ornamented.
+Sariputtra occupied the one on the left, and Maudgalyayana that on the right.
+Of the number of five hundred one was wanting. Mahakasyapa was president (on
+the middle seat). Ananda was then outside the door, and could not get in.(7) At
+the place there was (subsequently) raised a tope, which is still existing.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+Along (the sides of) the hill, there are also a very great many cells among the
+rocks, where the various Arhans sat and meditated. As you leave the old city on
+the north, and go down east for three le, there is the rock dwelling of
+Devadatta, and at a distance of fifty paces from it there is a large, square,
+black rock. Formerly there was a bhikshu, who, as he walked backwards and
+forwards upon it, thought with himself:&mdash;&ldquo;This body(8) is
+impermanent, a thing of bitterness and vanity,(9) and which cannot be looked on
+as pure.(10) I am weary of this body, and troubled by it as an evil.&rdquo;
+With this he grasped a knife, and was about to kill himself. But he thought
+again:&mdash;&ldquo;The World-honoured one laid down a prohibition against
+one&rsquo;s killing himself.&rdquo;(11) Further it occurred to
+him:&mdash;&ldquo;Yes, he did; but I now only wish to kill three poisonous
+thieves.&rdquo;(12) Immediately with the knife he cut his throat. With the
+first gash into the flesh he attained the state of a Srotapanna;(13) when he
+had gone half through, he attained to be an Anagamin;(14) and when he had cut
+right through, he was an Arhat, and attained to pari-nirvâna;(15) (and died).
+</p>
+
+<p class="center">
+NOTES
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(1) Karanda Venuvana; a park presented to Buddha by king Bimbisara, who also
+built a vihâra in it. See the account of the transaction in M. B., p. 194. The
+place was called Karanda, from a creature so named, which awoke the king just
+as a snake was about to bite him, and thus saved his life. In Hardy the
+creature appears as a squirrel, but Eitel says that the Karanda is a bird of
+sweet voice, resembling a magpie, but herding in flocks; the <i>cuculus
+melanoleucus</i>. See &ldquo;Buddhist Birth Stories,&rdquo; p. 118.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(2) The language here is rather contemptuous, as if our author had no sympathy
+with any other mode of disposing of the dead, but by his own Buddhistic method
+of cremation.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(3) The Chinese characters used for the name of this cavern serve also to name
+the pippala (peepul) tree, the <i>ficus religiosa</i>. They make us think that
+there was such a tree overshadowing the cave; but Fâ-Hien would hardly have
+neglected to mention such a circumstance.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(4) A very great place in the annals of Buddhism. The Council in the Srataparna
+cave did not come together fortuitously, but appears to have been convoked by
+the older members to settle the rules and doctrines of the order. The cave was
+prepared for the occasion by king Ajatasatru. From the expression about the
+&ldquo;bringing forth of the King,&rdquo; it would seem that the Sûtras or some
+of them had been already committed to writing. May not the meaning of King {.}
+here be extended to the Vinaya rules, as well as the Sûtras, and mean
+&ldquo;the standards&rdquo; of the system generally? See Davids&rsquo; Manual,
+chapter ix, and Sacred Books of the East, vol. xx, Vinaya Texts, pp. 370-385.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(5) So in the text, evidently for pari-nirvâna.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(6) Instead of &ldquo;high&rdquo; seats, the Chinese texts have
+&ldquo;vacant.&rdquo; The character for &ldquo;prepared&rdquo; denotes
+&ldquo;spread;&rdquo;&mdash;they were carpeted; perhaps, both cushioned and
+carpeted, being rugs spread on the ground, raised higher than the other places
+for seats.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(7) Did they not contrive to let him in, with some cachinnation, even in so
+august an assembly, that so important a member should have been shut out?
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(8) &ldquo;The life of this body&rdquo; would, I think, fairly express the idea
+of the bhikshu.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(9) See the account of Buddha&rsquo;s preaching in chapter xviii.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(10) The sentiment of this clause is not easily caught.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(11) See E. M., p. 152:&mdash;&ldquo;Buddha made a law forbidding the monks to
+commit suicide. He prohibited any one from discoursing on the miseries of life
+in such a manner as to cause desperation.&rdquo; See also M. B., pp. 464, 465.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(12) Beal says:&mdash;&ldquo;Evil desire; hatred; ignorance.&rdquo;
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(13) See chap. xx, note 10.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(14) The Anagamin belong to the third degree of Buddhistic saintship, the third
+class of Aryas, who are no more liable to be reborn as men, but are to be born
+once more as devas, when they will forthwith become Arhats, and attain to
+nirvâna. E. H., pp. 8, 9.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(15) Our author expresses no opinion of his own on the act of this bhikshu.
+Must it not have been a good act, when it was attended, in the very act of
+performance, by such blessed consequences? But if Buddhism had not something
+better to show than what appears here, it would not attract the interest which
+it now does. The bhikshu was evidently rather out of his mind; and the verdict
+of a coroner&rsquo;s inquest of this nineteenth century would have pronounced
+that he killed himself &ldquo;in a fit of insanity.&rdquo;
+</p>
+
+</div><!--end chapter-->
+
+<div class="chapter">
+
+<h2><a name="chap31"></a>CHAPTER XXXI.<br />
+GAYA. SAKYAMUNI&rsquo;S ATTAINING TO THE BUDDHASHIP; AND OTHER LEGENDS.
+</h2>
+
+<p>
+From this place, after travelling to the west for four yojanas, (the pilgrims)
+came to the city of Gaya;(1) but inside the city all was emptiness and
+desolation. Going on again to the south for twenty le, they arrived at the
+place where the Bodhisattva for six years practised with himself painful
+austerities. All around was forest.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+Three le west from here they came to the place where, when Buddha had gone into
+the water to bathe, a deva bent down the branch of a tree, by means of which he
+succeeded in getting out of the pool.(2)
+</p>
+
+<p>
+Two le north from this was the place where the Gramika girls presented to
+Buddha the rice-gruel made with milk;(3) and two le north from this (again) was
+the place where, seated on a rock under a great tree, and facing the east, he
+ate (the gruel). The tree and the rock are there at the present day. The rock
+may be six cubits in breadth and length, and rather more than two cubits in
+height. In Central India the cold and heat are so equally tempered that trees
+will live in it for several thousand and even for ten thousand years.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+Half a yojana from this place to the north-east there was a cavern in the
+rocks, into which the Bodhisattva entered, and sat cross-legged with his face
+to the west. (As he did so), he said to himself, &ldquo;If I am to attain to
+perfect wisdom (and become Buddha), let there be a supernatural attestation of
+it.&rdquo; On the wall of the rock there appeared immediately the shadow of a
+Buddha, rather more than three feet in length, which is still bright at the
+present day. At this moment heaven and earth were greatly moved, and devas in
+the air spoke plainly, &ldquo;This is not the place where any Buddha of the
+past, or he that is to come, has attained, or will attain, to perfect Wisdom.
+Less than half a yojana from this to the south-west will bring you to the
+patra(4) tree, where all past Buddhas have attained, and all to come must
+attain, to perfect Wisdom.&rdquo; When they had spoken these words, they
+immediately led the way forwards to the place, singing as they did so. As they
+thus went away, the Bodhisattva arose and walked (after them). At a distance of
+thirty paces from the tree, a deva gave him the grass of lucky omen,(5) which
+he received and went on. After (he had proceeded) fifteen paces, 500 green
+birds came flying towards him, went round him thrice, and disappeared. The
+Bodhisattva went forward to the patra tree, placed the kusa grass at the foot
+of it, and sat down with his face to the east. Then king Mara sent three
+beautiful young ladies, who came from the north, to tempt him, while he himself
+came from the south to do the same. The Bodhisattva put his toes down on the
+ground, and the demon soldiers retired and dispersed, and the three young
+ladies were changed into old (grand-)mothers.(6)
+</p>
+
+<p>
+At the place mentioned above of the six years&rsquo; painful austerities, and
+at all these other places, men subsequently reared topes and set up images,
+which all exist at the present day.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+Where Buddha, after attaining to perfect wisdom, for seven days contemplated
+the tree, and experienced the joy of vimukti;(7) where, under the patra tree,
+he walked backwards and forwards from west to east for seven days; where the
+devas made a hall appear, composed of the seven precious substances, and
+presented offerings to him for seven days; where the blind dragon Muchilinda(8)
+encircled him for seven days; where he sat under the nyagrodha tree, on a
+square rock, with his face to the east, and Brahma-deva(9) came and made his
+request to him; where the four deva kings brought to him their alms-bowls;(10)
+where the 500 merchants(11) presented to him the roasted flour and honey; and
+where he converted the brothers Kasyapa and their thousand
+disciples;(12)&mdash;at all these places topes were reared.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+At the place where Buddha attained to perfect Wisdom, there are three
+monasteries, in all of which there are monks residing. The families of their
+people around supply the societies of these monks with an abundant sufficiency
+of what they require, so that there is no lack or stint.(13) The disciplinary
+rules are strictly observed by them. The laws regulating their demeanour in
+sitting, rising, and entering when the others are assembled, are those which
+have been practised by all the saints since Buddha was in the world down to the
+present day. The places of the four great topes have been fixed, and handed
+down without break, since Buddha attained to nirvâna. Those four great topes
+are those at the places where Buddha was born; where he attained to Wisdom;
+where he (began to) move the wheel of his Law; and where he attained to
+pari-nirvâna.
+</p>
+
+<p class="center">
+NOTES
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(1) Gaya, a city of Magadha, was north-west of the present Gayah (lat. 24°
+47&#x2032; N., lon. 85° 1&#x2032; E). It was here that Sâkyamuni lived for
+seven years, after quitting his family, until he attained to Buddhaship. The
+place is still frequented by pilgrims. E. H., p. 41.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(2) This is told so as to make us think that he was in danger of being drowned;
+but this does not appear in the only other account of the incident I have met
+with,&mdash;in &ldquo;The Life of the Buddha,&rdquo; p. 31. And he was not yet
+Buddha, though he is here called so; unless indeed the narrative is confused,
+and the incidents do not follow in the order of time.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(3) An incident similar to this is told, with many additions, in Hardy&rsquo;s
+M. B., pp. 166-168; &ldquo;The Life of the Buddha,&rdquo; p. 30; and the
+&ldquo;Buddhist Birth Stories,&rdquo; pp. 91, 92; but the name of the
+ministering girl or girls is different. I take Gramika from a note in
+Beal&rsquo;s revised version; it seems to me a happy solution of the difficulty
+caused by the {.} {.} of Fâ-Hien.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(4) Called &ldquo;the tree of leaves,&rdquo; and &ldquo;the tree of
+reflection;&rdquo; a palm tree, the <i>borassus flabellifera</i>, described as
+a tree which never loses its leaves. It is often confounded with the pippala.
+E. H., p. 92.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(5) The kusa grass, mentioned in a previous note.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(6) See the account of this contest with Mara in M. B., pp. 171-179, and
+&ldquo;Buddhist Birth Stories,&rdquo; pp. 96-101.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(7) See chap. xiii, note 7.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(8) Called also Maha, or the Great Muchilinda. Eitel says: &ldquo;A naga king,
+the tutelary deity of a lake near which Sâkyamuni once sat for seven days
+absorbed in meditation, whilst the king guarded him.&rdquo; The account (p. 35)
+in &ldquo;The Life of the Buddha&rdquo; is:&mdash;&ldquo;Buddha went to where
+lived the naga king Muchilinda, and he, wishing to preserve him from the sun
+and rain, wrapped his body seven times round him, and spread out his hood over
+his head; and there he remained seven days in thought.&rdquo; So also the
+Nidana Katha, in &ldquo;Buddhist Birth Stories,&rdquo; p. 109.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(9) This was Brahma himself, though &ldquo;king&rdquo; is omitted. What he
+requested of the Buddha was that he would begin the preaching of his Law.
+Nidana Katha, p. 111.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(10) See chap. xii, note 10.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(11) The other accounts mention only two; but in M. B., p. 182, and the Nidana
+Katha, p. 110, these two have 500 well-laden waggons with them.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(12) These must not be confounded with Mahakasyapa of chap. xvi, note 17. They
+were three brothers, Uruvilva, Gaya, and Nadi-Kasyapa, up to this time holders
+of &ldquo;erroneous&rdquo; views, having 500, 300, and 200 disciples
+respectively. They became distinguished followers of Sâkyamuni; and
+are&mdash;each of them&mdash;to become Buddha by-and-by. See the Nidana Katha,
+pp. 114, 115.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(13) This seems to be the meaning; but I do not wonder that some understand the
+sentence of the benevolence of the monkish population to the travellers.
+</p>
+
+</div><!--end chapter-->
+
+<div class="chapter">
+
+<h2><a name="chap32"></a>CHAPTER XXXII.<br />
+LEGEND OF KING ASOKA IN A FORMER BIRTH, AND HIS NARAKA.</h2>
+
+<p>
+When king Asoka, in a former birth,(1) was a little boy and played on the road,
+he met Kasyapa Buddha walking. (The stranger) begged food, and the boy
+pleasantly took a handful of earth and gave it to him. The Buddha took the
+earth, and returned it to the ground on which he was walking; but because of
+this (the boy) received the recompense of becoming a king of the iron wheel,(2)
+to rule over Jambudvipa. (Once) when he was making a judicial tour of
+inspection through Jambudvipa, he saw, between the iron circuit of the two
+hills, a naraka(3) for the punishment of wicked men. Having thereupon asked his
+ministers what sort of a thing it was, they replied, &ldquo;It belongs to
+Yama,(4) king of demons, for punishing wicked people.&rdquo; The king thought
+within himself:&mdash;&ldquo;(Even) the king of demons is able to make a naraka
+in which to deal with wicked men; why should not I, who am the lord of men,
+make a naraka in which to deal with wicked men?&rdquo; He forthwith asked his
+ministers who could make for him a naraka and preside over the punishment of
+wicked people in it. They replied that it was only a man of extreme wickedness
+who could make it; and the king thereupon sent officers to seek everywhere for
+(such) a bad man; and they saw by the side of a pond a man tall and strong,
+with a black countenance, yellow hair, and green eyes, hooking up the fish with
+his feet, while he called to him birds and beasts, and, when they came, then
+shot and killed them, so that not one escaped. Having got this man, they took
+him to the king, who secretly charged him, &ldquo;You must make a square
+enclosure with high walls. Plant in it all kinds of flowers and fruits; make
+good ponds in it for bathing; make it grand and imposing in every way, so that
+men shall look to it with thirsting desire; make its gates strong and sure; and
+when any one enters, instantly seize him and punish him as a sinner, not
+allowing him to get out. Even if I should enter, punish me as a sinner in the
+same way, and do not let me go. I now appoint you master of that naraka.&rdquo;
+</p>
+
+<p>
+Soon after this a bhikshu, pursuing his regular course of begging his food,
+entered the gate (of the place). When the lictors of the naraka saw him, they
+were about to subject him to their tortures; but he, frightened, begged them to
+allow him a moment in which to eat his midday meal. Immediately after, there
+came in another man, whom they thrust into a mortar and pounded till a red
+froth overflowed. As the bhikshu looked on, there came to him the thought of
+the impermanence, the painful suffering and insanity of this body, and how it
+is but as a bubble and as foam; and instantly he attained to Arhatship.
+Immediately after, the lictors seized him, and threw him into a caldron of
+boiling water. There was a look of joyful satisfaction, however, in the
+bhikshu&rsquo;s countenance. The fire was extinguished, and the water became
+cold. In the middle (of the caldron) there rose up a lotus flower, with the
+bhikshu seated on it. The lictors at once went and reported to the king that
+there was a marvellous occurrence in the naraka, and wished him to go and see
+it; but the king said, &ldquo;I formerly made such an agreement that now I dare
+not go (to the place).&rdquo; The lictors said, &ldquo;This is not a small
+matter. Your majesty ought to go quickly. Let your former agreement be
+altered.&rdquo; The king thereupon followed them, and entered (the naraka),
+when the bhikshu preached the Law to him, and he believed, and was made
+free.(5) Forthwith he demolished the naraka, and repented of all the evil which
+he had formerly done. From this time he believed in and honoured the Three
+Precious Ones, and constantly went to a patra tree, repenting under it, with
+self-reproach, of his errors, and accepting the eight rules of abstinence.(6)
+</p>
+
+<p>
+The queen asked where the king was constantly going to, and the ministers
+replied that he was constantly to be seen under (such and such) a patra tree.
+She watched for a time when the king was not there, and then sent men to cut
+the tree down. When the king came, and saw what had been done, he swooned away
+with sorrow, and fell to the ground. His ministers sprinkled water on his face,
+and after a considerable time he revived. He then built all round (the stump)
+with bricks, and poured a hundred pitchers of cows&rsquo; milk on the roots;
+and as he lay with his four limbs spread out on the ground, he took this oath,
+&ldquo;If the tree do not live, I will never rise from this.&rdquo; When he had
+uttered this oath, the tree immediately began to grow from the roots, and it
+has continued to grow till now, when it is nearly 100 cubits in height.
+</p>
+
+<p class="center">
+NOTES
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(1) Here is an instance of {.} used, as was pointed out in chap. ix, note 3,
+for a former age; and not merely a former time. Perhaps &ldquo;a former
+birth&rdquo; is the best translation. The Corean reading of Kasyapa Buddha is
+certainly preferable to the Chinese &ldquo;Sakya Buddha.&rdquo;
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(2) See chap. xvii, note 8.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(3) I prefer to retain the Sanskrit term here, instead of translating the
+Chinese text by &ldquo;Earth&rsquo;s prison {.} {.},&rdquo; or &ldquo;a prison
+in the earth;&rdquo; the name for which has been adopted generally by Christian
+missionaries in China for gehenna and hell.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(4) Eitel (p. 173) says:&mdash;&ldquo;Yama was originally the Aryan god of the
+dead, living in a heaven above the world, the regent of the south; but
+Brahmanism transferred his abode to hell. Both views have been retained by
+Buddhism.&rdquo; The Yama of the text is the &ldquo;regent of the narakas,
+residing south of Jambudvipa, outside the Chakravalas (the double circuit of
+mountains above), in a palace built of brass and iron. He has a sister who
+controls all the female culprits, as he exclusively deals with the male sex.
+Three times, however, in every twenty-four hours, a demon pours boiling copper
+into Yama&rsquo;s mouth, and squeezes it down his throat, causing him
+unspeakable pain.&rdquo; Such, however, is the wonderful &ldquo;transrotation
+of births,&rdquo; that when Yama&rsquo;s sins have been expiated, he is to be
+reborn as Buddha, under the name of &ldquo;The Universal King.&rdquo;
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(5) Or, &ldquo;was loosed;&rdquo; from the bonds, I suppose, of his various
+illusions.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(6) I have not met with this particular numerical category.
+</p>
+
+</div><!--end chapter-->
+
+<div class="chapter">
+
+<h2><a name="chap33"></a>CHAPTER XXXIII.<br />
+MOUNT GURUPADA, WHERE KASYAPA BUDDHA&rsquo;S ENTIRE SKELETON IS.</h2>
+
+<p>
+(The travellers), going on from this three le to the south, came to a mountain
+named Gurupada,(1) inside which Mahakasyapa even now is. He made a cleft, and
+went down into it, though the place where he entered would not (now) admit a
+man. Having gone down very far, there was a hole on one side, and there the
+complete body of Kasyapa (still) abides. Outside the hole (at which he entered)
+is the earth with which he had washed his hands.(2) If the people living
+thereabouts have a sore on their heads, they plaster on it some of the earth
+from this, and feel immediately easier.(3) On this mountain, now as of old,
+there are Arhats abiding. Devotees of our Law from the various countries in
+that quarter go year by year to the mountain, and present offerings to Kasyapa;
+and to those whose hearts are strong in faith there come Arhats at night, and
+talk with them, discussing and explaining their doubts, and disappearing
+suddenly afterwards.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+On this hill hazels grow luxuriously; and there are many lions, tigers, and
+wolves, so that people should not travel incautiously.
+</p>
+
+<p class="center">
+NOTES
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(1) &ldquo;Fowl&rsquo;s-foot hill,&rdquo; &ldquo;with three peaks, resembling
+the foot of a chicken. It lies seven miles south-east of Gaya, and was the
+residence of Mahakasyapa, who is said to be still living inside this
+mountain.&rdquo; So Eitel says, p. 58; but this chapter does not say that
+Kasyapa is in the mountain alive, but that his body entire is in a recess or
+hole in it. Hardy (M. B., p. 97) says that after Kasyapa Buddha&rsquo;s body
+was burnt, the bones still remained in their usual position, presenting the
+appearance of a perfect skeleton. It is of him that the chapter speaks, and not
+of the famous disciple of Sâkyamuni, who also is called Mahakasyapa. This will
+appear also on a comparison of Eitel&rsquo;s articles on
+&ldquo;Mahakasyapa&rdquo; and &ldquo;Kasyapa Buddha.&rdquo;
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(2) Was it a custom to wash the hands with &ldquo;earth,&rdquo; as is often
+done with sand?
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(3) This I conceive to be the meaning here.
+</p>
+
+</div><!--end chapter-->
+
+<div class="chapter">
+
+<h2><a name="chap34"></a>CHAPTER XXXIV.<br />
+ON THE WAY BACK TO PATNA. VARANASI, OR BENARES. SAKYAMUNI&rsquo;S FIRST DOINGS
+AFTER BECOMING BUDDHA.
+</h2>
+
+<p>
+Fâ-Hien(1) returned (from here) towards Pataliputtra,(2) keeping along the
+course of the Ganges and descending in the direction of the west. After going
+ten yojanas he found a vihâra, named &ldquo;The Wilderness,&rdquo;&mdash;a
+place where Buddha had dwelt, and where there are monks now.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+Pursuing the same course, and going still to the west, he arrived, after twelve
+yojanas, at the city of Varanasi(3) in the kingdom of Kasi. Rather more than
+ten le to the north-east of the city, he found the vihâra in the park of
+&ldquo;The rishi&rsquo;s Deer-wild.&rdquo;(4) In this park there formerly
+resided a Pratyeka Buddha,(5) with whom the deer were regularly in the habit of
+stopping for the night. When the World-honoured one was about to attain to
+perfect Wisdom, the devas sang in the sky, &ldquo;The son of king Suddhodana,
+having quitted his family and studied the Path (of Wisdom),(6) will now in
+seven days become Buddha.&rdquo; The Pratyeka Buddha heard their words, and
+immediately attained to nirvâna; and hence this place was named &ldquo;The Park
+of the rishi&rsquo;s Deer-wild.&rdquo;(7) After the World-honoured one had
+attained to perfect Wisdom, men build the vihâra in it.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+Buddha wished to convert Kaundinya(8) and his four companions; but they, (being
+aware of his intention), said to one another, &ldquo;This Sramana Gotama(9) for
+six years continued in the practice of painful austerities, eating daily (only)
+a single hemp-seed, and one grain of rice, without attaining to the Path (of
+Wisdom); how much less will he do so now that he has entered (again) among men,
+and is giving the reins to (the indulgence of) his body, his speech, and his
+thoughts! What has he to do with the Path (of Wisdom)? To-day, when he comes to
+us, let us be on our guard not to speak with him.&rdquo; At the places where
+the five men all rose up, and respectfully saluted (Buddha), when he came to
+them; where, sixty paces north from this, he sat with his face to the east, and
+first turned the wheel of the Law, converting Kaundinya and the four others;
+where, twenty paces further to the north, he delivered his prophecy concerning
+Maitreya;(10) and where, at a distance of fifty paces to the south, the dragon
+Elapattra(11) asked him, &ldquo;When shall I get free from this naga
+body?&rdquo;&mdash;at all these places topes were reared, and are still
+existing. In (the park) there are two monasteries, in both of which there are
+monks residing.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+When you go north-west from the vihâra of the Deer-wild park for thirteen
+yojanas, there is a kingdom named Kausambi.(12) Its vihâra is named
+Ghochiravana(13)&mdash;a place where Buddha formerly resided. Now, as of old,
+there is a company of monks there, most of whom are students of the hinayana.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+East from (this), when you have travelled eight yojanas, is the place where
+Buddha converted(14) the evil demon. There, and where he walked (in meditation)
+and sat at the place which was his regular abode, there have been topes
+erected. There is also a monastery, which may contain more than a hundred
+monks.
+</p>
+
+<p class="center">
+NOTES
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(1) Fâ-Hien is here mentioned singly, as in the account of his visit to the
+cave on Gridhra-kuta. I think that Tao-ching may have remained at Patna after
+their first visit to it.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(2) See chap. xxvii, note 1.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(3) &ldquo;The city surrounded by rivers;&rdquo; the modern Benares, lat. 25°
+23&#x2032; N., lon. 83° 5&#x2032; E.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(4) &ldquo;The rishi,&rdquo; says Eitel, &ldquo;is a man whose bodily frame has
+undergone a certain transformation by dint of meditation and ascetism, so that
+he is, for an indefinite period, exempt from decrepitude, age, and death. As
+this period is believed to extend far beyond the usual duration of human life,
+such persons are called, and popularly believed to be, immortals.&rdquo; Rishis
+are divided into various classes; and rishi-ism is spoken of as a seventh part
+of transrotation, and rishis are referred to as the seventh class of sentient
+beings. Taoism, as well as Buddhism, has its Seen jin.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(5) See chap. xiii, note 15.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(6) See chap. xxii, note 2.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(7) For another legend about this park, and the identification of &ldquo;a fine
+wood&rdquo; still existing, see note in Beal&rsquo;s first version, p. 135.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(8) A prince of Magadha and a maternal uncle of Sâkyamuni, who gave him the
+name of Ajnata, meaning automat; and hence he often appears as Ajnata
+Kaundinya. He and his four friends had followed Sâkyamuni into the Uruvilva
+desert, sympathising with him in the austerities he endured, and hoping that
+they would issue in his Buddhaship. They were not aware that that issue had
+come; which may show us that all the accounts in the thirty-first chapter are
+merely descriptions, by means of external imagery, of what had taken place
+internally. The kingdom of nirvâna had come without observation. These friends
+knew it not; and they were offended by what they considered Sâkyamuni&rsquo;s
+failure, and the course he was now pursuing. See the account of their
+conversion in M. B., p. 186.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(9) This is the only instance in Fâ-Hien&rsquo;s text where the Bodhisattva or
+Buddha is called by the surname &ldquo;Gotama.&rdquo; For the most part our
+traveller uses Buddha as a proper name, though it properly means &ldquo;The
+Enlightened.&rdquo; He uses also the combinations &ldquo;Sakya
+Buddha,&rdquo;=&ldquo;The Buddha of the Sakya tribe,&rdquo; and
+&ldquo;Sâkyamuni,&rdquo;=&ldquo;The Sakya sage.&rdquo; This last is the most
+common designation of the Buddha in China, and to my mind best combines the
+characteristics of a descriptive and a proper name. Among other Buddhistic
+peoples &ldquo;Gotama&rdquo; and &ldquo;Gotama Buddha&rdquo; are the more
+frequent designations. It is not easy to account for the rise of the surname
+Gotama in the Sakya family, as Oldenberg acknowledges. He says that &ldquo;the
+Sakyas, in accordance with the custom of Indian noble families, had borrowed it
+from one of the ancient Vedic bard families.&rdquo; Dr. Davids
+(&ldquo;Buddhism,&rdquo; p. 27) says: &ldquo;The family name was certainly
+Gautama,&rdquo; adding in a note, &ldquo;It is a curious fact that Gautama is
+still the family name of the Rajput chiefs of Nagara, the village which has
+been identified with Kapilavastu.&rdquo; Dr. Eitel says that &ldquo;Gautama was
+the sacerdotal name of the Sakya family, which counted the ancient rishi
+Gautama among its ancestors.&rdquo; When we proceed, however, to endeavour to
+trace the connexion of that Brahmanical rishi with the Sakya house, by means of
+1323, 1468, 1469, and other historical works in Nanjio&rsquo;s Catalogue, we
+soon find that Indian histories have no surer foundation than the shifting
+sand;&mdash;see E. H., on the name Sakya, pp. 108, 109. We must be content for
+the present simply to accept Gotama as one of the surnames of the Buddha with
+whom we have to do.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(10) See chap. vi, note 5. It is there said that the prediction of
+Maitreya&rsquo;s succession to the Buddhaship was made to him in the Tushita
+heaven. Was there a repetition of it here in the Deer-park, or was a prediction
+now given concerning something else?
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(11) Nothing seems to be known of this naga but what we read here.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(12) Identified by some with Kusia, near Kurrah (lat. 25° 41&#x2032; N., lon.
+81° 27&#x2032; E.); by others with Kosam on the Jumna, thirty miles above
+Allahabad. See E. H., p. 55.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(13) Ghochira was the name of a Vaisya elder, or head, who presented a garden
+and vihâra to Buddha. Hardy (M. B., p. 356) quotes a statement from a
+Singhalese authority that Sâkyamuni resided here during the ninth year of his
+Buddhaship.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(14) Dr. Davids thinks this may refer to the striking and beautiful story of
+the conversion of the Yakkha Alavaka, as related in the Uragavagga,
+Alavakasutta, pp. 29-31 (Sacred Books of the East, vol. x, part ii).
+</p>
+
+</div><!--end chapter-->
+
+<div class="chapter">
+
+<h2><a name="chap35"></a>CHAPTER XXXV.<br />
+DAKSHINA, AND THE PIGEON MONASTERY.</h2>
+
+<p>
+South from this 200 yojanas, there is a country named Dakshina,(1) where there
+is a monastery (dedicated to) the bygone Kasyapa Buddha, and which has been
+hewn out from a large hill of rock. It consists in all of five
+storeys;&mdash;the lowest, having the form of an elephant, with 500 apartments
+in the rock; the second, having the form of a lion, with 400 apartments; the
+third, having the form of a horse, with 300 apartments; the fourth, having the
+form of an ox, with 200 apartments; and the fifth, having the form of a pigeon,
+with 100 apartments. At the very top there is a spring, the water of which,
+always in front of the apartments in the rock, goes round among the rooms, now
+circling, now curving, till in this way it arrives at the lowest storey, having
+followed the shape of the structure, and flows out there at the door.
+Everywhere in the apartments of the monks, the rock has been pierced so as to
+form windows for the admission of light, so that they are all bright, without
+any being left in darkness. At the four corners of the (tiers of) apartments,
+the rock has been hewn so as to form steps for ascending to the top (of each).
+The men of the present day, being of small size, and going up step by step,
+manage to get to the top; but in a former age, they did so at one step.(2)
+Because of this, the monastery is called Paravata, that being the Indian name
+for a pigeon. There are always Arhats residing in it.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+The country about is (a tract of) uncultivated hillocks,(3) without
+inhabitants. At a very long distance from the hill there are villages, where
+the people all have bad and erroneous views, and do not know the Sramanas of
+the Law of Buddha, Brahmanas, or (devotees of) any of the other and different
+schools. The people of that country are constantly seeing men on the wing, who
+come and enter this monastery. On one occasion, when devotees of various
+countries came to perform their worship at it, the people of those villages
+said to them, &ldquo;Why do you not fly? The devotees whom we have seen
+hereabouts all fly;&rdquo; and the strangers answered, on the spur of the
+moment, &ldquo;Our wings are not yet fully formed.&rdquo;
+</p>
+
+<p>
+The kingdom of Dakshina is out of the way, and perilous to traverse. There are
+difficulties in connexion with the roads; but those who know how to manage such
+difficulties and wish to proceed should bring with them money and various
+articles, and give them to the king. He will then send men to escort them.
+These will (at different stages) pass them over to others, who will show them
+the shortest routes. Fâ-Hien, however, was after all unable to go there; but
+having received the (above) accounts from men of the country, he has narrated
+them.
+</p>
+
+<p class="center">
+NOTES
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(1) Said to be the ancient name of the Deccan. As to the various marvels in the
+chapter, it must be borne in mind that our author, as he tells us at the end,
+only gives them from hearsay. See &ldquo;Buddhist Records of the Western
+World,&rdquo; vol. ii, pp. 214, 215, where the description, however, is very
+different.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(2) Compare the account of Buddha&rsquo;s great stride of fifteen yojanas in
+Ceylon, as related in chapter xxxviii.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(3) See the same phrase in the Books of the Later Han dynasty, the
+twenty-fourth Book of Biographies, p. 9b.
+</p>
+
+</div><!--end chapter-->
+
+<div class="chapter">
+
+<h2><a name="chap36"></a>CHAPTER XXXVI.<br />
+IN PATNA. FÂ-HIEN&rsquo;S LABOURS IN TRANSCRIPTION OF MANUSCRIPTS, AND INDIAN
+STUDIES FOR THREE YEARS.</h2>
+
+<p>
+From Varanasi (the travellers) went back east to Pataliputtra. Fâ-Hien&rsquo;s
+original object had been to search for (copies of) the Vinaya. In the various
+kingdoms of North India, however, he had found one master transmitting orally
+(the rules) to another, but no written copies which he could transcribe. He had
+therefore travelled far and come on to Central India. Here, in the mahayana
+monastery,(1) he found a copy of the Vinaya, containing the Mahasanghika(2)
+rules,&mdash;those which were observed in the first Great Council, while Buddha
+was still in the world. The original copy was handed down in the Jetavana
+vihâra. As to the other eighteen schools,(3) each one has the views and
+decisions of its own masters. Those agree (with this) in the general meaning,
+but they have small and trivial differences, as when one opens and another
+shuts.(4) This copy (of the rules), however, is the most complete, with the
+fullest explanations.(5)
+</p>
+
+<p>
+He further got a transcript of the rules in six or seven thousand gathas,(6)
+being the sarvastivadah(7) rules,&mdash;those which are observed by the
+communities of monks in the land of Ts&rsquo;in; which also have all been
+handed down orally from master to master without being committed to writing. In
+the community here, moreover, we got the
+Samyuktabhi-dharma-hridaya-(sastra),(8) containing about six or seven thousand
+gathas; he also got a Sutra of 2500 gathas; one chapter of the
+Parinir-vana-vaipulya Sutra,(9) of about 5000 gathas; and the Mahasan-ghikah
+Abhidharma.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+In consequence (of this success in his quest) Fâ-Hien stayed here for three
+years, learning Sanskrit books and the Sanskrit speech, and writing out the
+Vinaya rules. When Tao-ching arrived in the Central Kingdom, and saw the rules
+observed by the Sramanas, and the dignified demeanour in their societies which
+he remarked under all occurring circumstances, he sadly called to mind in what
+a mutilated and imperfect condition the rules were among the monkish
+communities in the land of Ts&rsquo;in, and made the following
+aspiration:&mdash;&ldquo;From this time forth till I come to the state of
+Buddha, let me not be born in a frontier land.&rdquo;(10) He remained
+accordingly (in India), and did not return (to the land of Han). Fâ-Hien,
+however, whose original purpose had been to secure the introduction of the
+complete Vinaya rules into the land of Han, returned there alone.
+</p>
+
+<p class="center">
+NOTES
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(1) Mentioned before in chapter xxvii.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(2) Mahasanghikah simply means &ldquo;the Great Assembly,&rdquo; that is, of
+monks. When was this first assembly in the time of Sâkyamuni held? It does not
+appear that the rules observed at it were written down at the time. The
+document found by Fâ-Hien would be a record of those rules; or rather a copy
+of that record. We must suppose that the original record had disappeared from
+the Jetavana vihâra, or Fâ-Hien would probably have spoken of it when he was
+there, and copied it, if he had been allowed to do so.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(3) The eighteen pu {.}. Four times in this chapter the character called pu
+occurs, and in the first and two last instances it can only have the meaning,
+often belonging to it, of &ldquo;copy.&rdquo; The second instance, however, is
+different. How should there be eighteen copies, all different from the
+original, and from one another, in minor matters? We are compelled to
+translate&mdash;&ldquo;the eighteen schools,&rdquo; an expression well known in
+all Buddhist writings. See Rhys Davids&rsquo; Manual, p. 218, and the
+authorities there quoted.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(4) This is equivalent to the &ldquo;binding&rdquo; and &ldquo;loosing,&rdquo;
+&ldquo;opening&rdquo; and &ldquo;shutting,&rdquo; which found their way into
+the New Testament, and the Christian Church, from the schools of the Jewish
+Rabbins.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(5) It was afterwards translated by Fâ-Hien into Chinese. See Nanjio&rsquo;s
+Catalogue of the Chinese Tripitaka, columns 400 and 401, and Nos. 1119 and
+1150, columns 247 and 253.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(6) A gatha is a stanza, generally consisting, it has seemed to me, of a few,
+commonly of two, lines somewhat metrically arranged; but I do not know that its
+length is strictly defined.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(7) &ldquo;A branch,&rdquo; says Eitel, &ldquo;of the great vaibhashika school,
+asserting the reality of all visible phenomena, and claiming the authority of
+Rahula.&rdquo;
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(8) See Nanjio&rsquo;s Catalogue, No. 1287. He does not mention it in his
+account of Fâ-Hien, who, he says, translated the Samyukta-pitaka Sutra.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(9) Probably Nanjio&rsquo;s Catalogue, No. 120; at any rate, connected with it.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(10) This then would be the consummation of the Sramana&rsquo;s being,&mdash;to
+get to be Buddha, the Buddha of his time in his Kalpa; and Tao-ching thought
+that he could attain to this consummation by a succession of births; and was
+likely to attain to it sooner by living only in India. If all this was not in
+his mind, he yet felt that each of his successive lives would be happier, if
+lived in India.
+</p>
+
+</div><!--end chapter-->
+
+<div class="chapter">
+
+<h2><a name="chap37"></a>CHAPTER XXXVII.<br />
+TO CHAMPA AND TAMALIPTI. STAY AND LABOURS THERE FOR THREE YEARS. TAKES SHIP TO
+SINGHALA, OR CEYLON.</h2>
+
+<p>
+Following the course of the Ganges, and descending eastwards for eighteen
+yojanas, he found on the southern bank the great kingdom of Champa,(1) with
+topes reared at the places where Buddha walked in meditation by his vihâra, and
+where he and the three Buddhas, his predecessors, sat. There were monks
+residing at them all. Continuing his journey east for nearly fifty yojanas, he
+came to the country of Tamalipti,(2) (the capital of which is) a seaport. In
+the country there are twenty-two monasteries, at all of which there are monks
+residing. The Law of Buddha is also flourishing in it. Here Fâ-Hien stayed two
+years, writing out his Sûtras,(3) and drawing pictures of images.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+After this he embarked in a large merchant-vessel, and went floating over the
+sea to the south-west. It was the beginning of winter, and the wind was
+favourable; and, after fourteen days, sailing day and night, they came to the
+country of Singhala.(4) The people said that it was distant (from Tamalipti)
+about 700 yojanas.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+The kingdom is on a large island, extending from east to west fifty yojanas,
+and from north to south thirty. Left and right from it there are as many as 100
+small islands, distant from one another ten, twenty, or even 200 le; but all
+subject to the large island. Most of them produce pearls and precious stones of
+various kinds; there is one which produces the pure and brilliant
+pearl,(5)&mdash;an island which would form a square of about ten le. The king
+employs men to watch and protect it, and requires three out of every ten such
+pearls, which the collectors find.
+</p>
+
+<p class="center">
+NOTES
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(1) Probably the modern Champanagur, three miles west of Baglipoor, lat. 25°
+14&#x2032; N., lon. 56° 55&#x2032; E.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(2) Then the principal emporium for the trade with Ceylon and China; the modern
+Tam-look, lat. 22° 17&#x2032; N., lon. 88° 2&#x2032; E.; near the mouth of the
+Hoogly.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(3) Perhaps Ching {.} is used here for any portions of the Tripitaka which he
+had obtained.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(4) &ldquo;The Kingdom of the Lion,&rdquo; Ceylon. Singhala was the name of a
+merchant adventurer from India, to whom the founding of the kingdom was
+ascribed. His father was named Singha, &ldquo;the Lion,&rdquo; which became the
+name of the country;&mdash;Singhala, or Singha-Kingdom, &ldquo;the Country of
+the Lion.&rdquo;
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(5) Called the mani pearl or bead. Mani is explained as meaning &ldquo;free
+from stain,&rdquo; &ldquo;bright and growing purer.&rdquo; It is a symbol of
+Buddha and of his Law. The most valuable rosaries are made of manis.
+</p>
+
+</div><!--end chapter-->
+
+<div class="chapter">
+
+<h2><a name="chap38"></a>CHAPTER XXXVIII.<br />
+AT CEYLON. RISE OF THE KINGDOM. FEATS OF BUDDHA. TOPES AND MONASTERIES. STATUE
+OF BUDDHA IN JADE. BO TREE. FESTIVAL OF BUDDHA&rsquo;S TOOTH.</h2>
+
+<p>
+The country originally had no human inhabitants,(1) but was occupied only by
+spirits and nagas, with which merchants of various countries carried on a
+trade. When the trafficking was taking place, the spirits did not show
+themselves. They simply set forth their precious commodities, with labels of
+the price attached to them; while the merchants made their purchases according
+to the price; and took the things away.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+Through the coming and going of the merchants (in this way), when they went
+away, the people of (their) various countries heard how pleasant the land was,
+and flocked to it in numbers till it became a great nation. The (climate) is
+temperate and attractive, without any difference of summer and winter. The
+vegetation is always luxuriant. Cultivation proceeds whenever men think fit:
+there are no fixed seasons for it.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+When Buddha came to this country,(2) wishing to transform the wicked nagas, by
+his supernatural power he planted one foot at the north of the royal city, and
+the other on the top of a mountain,(3) the two being fifteen yojanas apart.
+Over the footprint at the north of the city the king built a large tope, 400
+cubits high, grandly adorned with gold and silver, and finished with a
+combination of all the precious substances. By the side of the top he further
+built a monastery, called the Abhayagiri,(4) where there are (now) five
+thousand monks. There is in it a hall of Buddha, adorned with carved and inlaid
+works of gold and silver, and rich in the seven precious substances, in which
+there is an image (of Buddha) in green jade, more than twenty cubits in height,
+glittering all over with those substances, and having an appearance of solemn
+dignity which words cannot express. In the palm of the right hand there is a
+priceless pearl. Several years had now elapsed since Fâ-Hien left the land of
+Han; the men with whom he had been in intercourse had all been of regions
+strange to him; his eyes had not rested on an old and familiar hill or river,
+plant or tree; his fellow-travellers, moreover, had been separated from him,
+some by death, and others flowing off in different directions; no face or
+shadow was now with him but his own, and a constant sadness was in his heart.
+Suddenly (one day), when by the side of this image of jade, he saw a merchant
+presenting as his offering a fan of white silk;(5) and the tears of sorrow
+involuntarily filled his eyes and fell down.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+A former king of the country had sent to Central India and got a slip of the
+patra tree,(6) which he planted by the side of the hall of Buddha, where a tree
+grew up to the height of about 200 cubits. As it bent on one side towards the
+south-east, the king, fearing it would fall, propped it with a post eight or
+nine spans round. The tree began to grow at the very heart of the prop, where
+it met (the trunk); (a shoot) pierced through the post, and went down to the
+ground, where it entered and formed roots, that rose (to the surface) and were
+about four spans round. Although the post was split in the middle, the outer
+portions kept hold (of the shoot), and people did not remove them. Beneath the
+tree there has been built a vihâra, in which there is an image (of Buddha)
+seated, which the monks and commonalty reverence and look up to without ever
+becoming wearied. In the city there has been reared also the vihâra of
+Buddha&rsquo;s tooth, on which, as well as on the other, the seven precious
+substances have been employed.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+The king practises the Brahmanical purifications, and the sincerity of the
+faith and reverence of the population inside the city are also great. Since the
+establishment of government in the kingdom there has been no famine or
+scarcity, no revolution or disorder. In the treasuries of the monkish
+communities there are many precious stones, and the priceless manis. One of the
+kings (once) entered one of those treasuries, and when he looked all round and
+saw the priceless pearls, his covetous greed was excited, and he wished to take
+them to himself by force. In three days, however, he came to himself, and
+immediately went and bowed his head to the ground in the midst of the monks, to
+show his repentance of the evil thought. As a sequel to this, he informed the
+monks (of what had been in his mind), and desired them to make a regulation
+that from that day forth the king should not be allowed to enter the treasury
+and see (what it contained), and that no bhikshu should enter it till after he
+had been in orders for a period of full forty years.(7)
+</p>
+
+<p>
+In the city there are many Vaisya elders and Sabaean(8) merchants, whose houses
+are stately and beautiful. The lanes and passages are kept in good order. At
+the heads of the four principal streets there have been built preaching halls,
+where, on the eighth, fourteenth, and fifteenth days of the month, they spread
+carpets, and set forth a pulpit, while the monks and commonalty from all
+quarters come together to hear the Law. The people say that in the kingdom
+there may be altogether sixty thousand monks, who get their food from their
+common stores. The king, besides, prepares elsewhere in the city a common
+supply of food for five or six thousand more. When any want, they take their
+great bowls, and go (to the place of distribution), and take as much as the
+vessels will hold, all returning with them full.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+The tooth of Buddha is always brought forth in the middle of the third month.
+Ten days beforehand the king grandly caparisons a large elephant, on which he
+mounts a man who can speak distinctly, and is dressed in royal robes, to beat a
+large drum, and make the following proclamation:&mdash;&ldquo;The Bodhisattva,
+during three Asankhyeya-kalpas,(9) manifested his activity, and did not spare
+his own life. He gave up kingdom, city, wife, and son; he plucked out his eyes
+and gave them to another;(10) he cut off a piece of his own flesh to ransom the
+life of a dove;(10) he cut off his head and gave it as an alms;(11) he gave his
+body to feed a starving tigress;(11) he grudged not his marrow and his brains.
+In many such ways as these did he undergo pain for the sake of all living. And
+so it was, that, having become Buddha, he continued in the world for forty-five
+years, preaching his Law, teaching and transforming, so that those who had no
+rest found rest, and the unconverted were converted. When his connexion with
+the living was completed,(12) he attained to pari-nirvâna (and died). Since
+that event, for 1497 years, the light of the world has gone out,(13) and all
+living beings have had long-continued sadness. Behold! ten days after this,
+Buddha&rsquo;s tooth will be brought forth, and taken to the Abhayagiri-vihâra.
+Let all and each, whether monks or laics, who wish to amass merit for
+themselves, make the roads smooth and in good condition, grandly adorn the
+lanes and by-ways, and provide abundant store of flowers and incense to be used
+as offerings to it.&rdquo;
+</p>
+
+<p>
+When this proclamation is over, the king exhibits, so as to line both sides of
+the road, the five hundred different bodily forms in which the Bodhisattva has
+in the course of his history appeared:&mdash;here as Sudana,(14) there as
+Sama;(15) now as the king of elephants;(16) and then as a stag or a horse.(16)
+All these figures are brightly coloured and grandly executed, looking as if
+they were alive. After this the tooth of Buddha is brought forth, and is
+carried along in the middle of the road. Everywhere on the way offerings are
+presented to it, and thus it arrives at the hall of Buddha in the
+Abhayagiri-vihâra. There monks and laics are collected in crowds. They burn
+incense, light lamps, and perform all the prescribed services, day and night
+without ceasing, till ninety days have been completed, when (the tooth) is
+returned to the vihâra within the city. On fast-days the door of that vihâra is
+opened, and the forms of ceremonial reverence are observed according to the
+rules.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+Forty le to the east of the Abhayagiri-vihâra there is a hill, with a vihâra on
+it, called the Chaitya,(17) where there may be 2000 monks. Among them there is
+a Sramana of great virtue, named Dharma-gupta,(18) honoured and looked up to by
+all the kingdom. He has lived for more than forty years in an apartment of
+stone, constantly showing such gentleness of heart, that he has brought snakes
+and rats to stop together in the same room, without doing one another any harm.
+</p>
+
+<p class="center">
+NOTES
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(1) It is desirable to translate {.} {.}, for which &ldquo;inhabitants&rdquo;
+or &ldquo;people&rdquo; is elsewhere sufficient, here by &ldquo;human
+inhabitants.&rdquo; According to other accounts Singhala was originally
+occupied by Rakshasas or Rakshas, &ldquo;demons who devour men,&rdquo; and
+&ldquo;beings to be feared,&rdquo; monstrous cannibals or anthropophagi, the
+terror of the shipwrecked mariner. Our author&rsquo;s &ldquo;spirits&rdquo; {.}
+{.} were of a gentler type. His dragons or nagas have come before us again and
+again.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(2) That Sâkyamuni ever visited Ceylon is to me more than doubtful. Hardy, in
+M. B., pp. 207-213, has brought together the legends of three visits,&mdash;in
+the first, fifth, and eighth years of his Buddhaship. It is plain, however,
+from Fâ-Hien&rsquo;s narrative, that in the beginning of our fifth century,
+Buddhism prevailed throughout the island. Davids in the last chapter of his
+&ldquo;Buddhism&rdquo; ascribes its introduction to one of Asoka&rsquo;s
+missions, after the Council of Patna, under his son Mahinda, when Tissa,
+&ldquo;the delight of the gods,&rdquo; was king (B.C. 250-230).
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(3) This would be what is known as &ldquo;Adam&rsquo;s peak,&rdquo; having,
+according to Hardy (pp. 211, 212, notes), the three names of Selesumano,
+Samastakuta, and Samanila. &ldquo;There is an indentation on the top of
+it,&rdquo; a superficial hollow, 5 feet 3 3<i>4 inches long, and about 2 1</i>2
+feet wide. The Hindus regard it as the footprint of Siva; the Mohameddans, as
+that of Adam; and the Buddhists, as in the text,&mdash;as having been made by
+Buddha.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(4) Meaning &ldquo;The Fearless Hill.&rdquo; There is still the Abhayagiri
+tope, the highest in Ceylon, according to Davids, 250 feet in height, and built
+about B.C. 90, by Watta Gamini, in whose reign, about 160 years after the
+Council of Patna, and 330 years after the death of Sâkyamuni, the Tripitaka was
+first reduced to writing in Ceylon;&mdash;&ldquo;Buddhism,&rdquo; p. 234.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(5) We naturally suppose that the merchant-offerer was a Chinese, as indeed the
+Chinese texts say, and the fan such as Fâ-Hien had seen and used in his native
+land.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(6) This should be the pippala, or bodhidruma, generally spoken of, in
+connexion with Buddha, as the Bo tree, under which he attained to the
+Buddhaship. It is strange our author should have confounded them as he seems to
+do. In what we are told of the tree here, we have, no doubt, his account of the
+planting, growth, and preservation of the famous Bo tree, which still exists in
+Ceylon. It has been stated in a previous note that Asoka&rsquo;s son, Mahinda,
+went as the apostle of Buddhism to Ceylon. By-and-by he sent for his sister
+Sanghamitta, who had entered the order at the same time as himself, and whose
+help was needed, some of the king&rsquo;s female relations having signified
+their wish to become nuns. On leaving India, she took with her a branch of the
+sacred Bo tree at Buddha Gaya, under which Sâkyamuni had become Buddha. Of how
+the tree has grown and still lives we have an account in Davids&rsquo;
+&ldquo;Buddhism.&rdquo; He quotes the words of Sir Emerson Tennent, that it is
+&ldquo;the oldest historical tree in the world;&rdquo; but this must be denied
+if it be true, as Eitel says, that the tree at Buddha Gaya, from which the slip
+that grew to be this tree was taken more than 2000 years ago, is itself still
+living in its place. We must conclude that Fâ-Hien, when in Ceylon, heard
+neither of Mahinda nor Sanghamitta.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(7) Compare what is said in chap. xvi, about the inquiries made at monasteries
+as to the standing of visitors in the monkhood, and duration of their ministry.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(8) The phonetic values of the two Chinese characters here are in Sanskrit sa;
+and va, bo or bha. &ldquo;Sabaean&rdquo; is Mr. Beal&rsquo;s reading of them,
+probably correct. I suppose the merchants were Arabs, forerunners of the
+so-called Moormen, who still form so important a part of the mercantile
+community in Ceylon.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(9) A Kalpa, we have seen, denotes a great period of time; a period during
+which a physical universe is formed and destroyed. Asankhyeya denotes the
+highest sum for which a conventional term exists;&mdash;according to Chinese
+calculations equal to one followed by seventeen ciphers; according to Thibetan
+and Singhalese, equal to one followed by ninety-seven ciphers. Every Maha-kalpa
+consists of four Asankhyeya-kalpas. Eitel, p. 15.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(10) See chapter ix.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(11) See chapter xi.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(12) He had been born in the Sakya house, to do for the world what the
+character of all his past births required, and he had done it.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(13) They could no more see him, the World-honoured one. Compare the Sacred
+Books of the East, vol. xi, Buddhist Suttas, pp. 89, 121, and note on p. 89.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(14) Sudana or Sudatta was the name of the Bodhisattva in the birth which
+preceded his appearance as Sâkyamuni or Gotama, when he became the Supreme
+Buddha. This period is known as the Vessantara Jataka, of which Hardy, M. B.,
+pp. 116-124, gives a long account; see also &ldquo;Buddhist Birth
+Stories,&rdquo; the Nidana Katha, p. 158. In it, as Sudana, he fulfilled
+&ldquo;the Perfections,&rdquo; his distinguishing attribute being entire
+self-renunciation and alms-giving, so that in the Nidana Katha is made to say
+(&ldquo;Buddhist Birth Stories,&rdquo; p. 159):&mdash;<br />
+    &ldquo;This earth, unconscious though she be, and ignorant of joy or grief,
+Even she by my free-giving&rsquo;s mighty power was shaken seven
+times.&rdquo;<br />
+    Then, when he passed away, he appeared in the Tushita heaven, to enter in
+due time the womb of Maha-maya, and be born as Sâkyamuni.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(15) I take the name Sama from Beal&rsquo;s revised version. He says in a note
+that the Sama Jataka, as well as the Vessantara, is represented in the Sanchi
+sculptures. But what the Sama Jataka was I do not yet know. But adopting this
+name, the two Chinese characters in the text should be translated &ldquo;the
+change into Sama.&rdquo; Rémusat gives for them, &ldquo;la transformation en
+eclair;&rdquo; Beal, in his first version, &ldquo;his appearance as a bright
+flash of light;&rdquo; Giles, &ldquo;as a flash of lightning.&rdquo;
+Julien&rsquo;s Methode does not give the phonetic value in Sanskrit of {.}.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(16) In an analysis of the number of times and the different forms in which
+Sâkyamuni had appeared in his Jataka births, given by Hardy (M. B., p. 100), it
+is said that he had appeared six times as an elephant; ten times as a deer; and
+four times as a horse.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(17) Chaitya is a general term designating all places and objects of religious
+worship which have a reference to ancient Buddhas, and including therefore
+Stupas and temples as well as sacred relics, pictures, statues, &amp;c. It is
+defined as &ldquo;a fane,&rdquo; &ldquo;a place for worship and presenting
+offerings.&rdquo; Eitel, p. 141. The hill referred to is the sacred hill of
+Mihintale, about eight miles due east of the Bo tree;&mdash;Davids&rsquo;
+Buddhism, pp. 230, 231.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(18) Eitel says (p. 31): &ldquo;A famous ascetic, the founder of a school,
+which flourished in Ceylon, A.D. 400.&rdquo; But Fâ-Hien gives no intimation
+of Dharma-gupta&rsquo;s founding a school.
+</p>
+
+</div><!--end chapter-->
+
+<div class="chapter">
+
+<h2><a name="chap39"></a>CHAPTER XXXIX.<br />
+CREMATION OF AN ARHAT. SERMON OF A DEVOTEE.</h2>
+
+<p>
+South of the city seven le there is a vihâra, called the Maha-vihâra, where
+3000 monks reside. There had been among them a Sramana, of such lofty virtue,
+and so holy and pure in his observance of the disciplinary rules, that the
+people all surmised that he was an Arhat. When he drew near his end, the king
+came to examine into the point; and having assembled the monks according to
+rule, asked whether the bhikshu had attained to the full degree of Wisdom.(1)
+They answered in the affirmative, saying that he was an Arhat. The king
+accordingly, when he died, buried him after the fashion of an Arhat, as the
+regular rules prescribed. Four of five le east from the vihâra there was reared
+a great pile of firewood, which might be more than thirty cubits square, and
+the same in height. Near the top were laid sandal, aloe, and other kinds of
+fragrant wood.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+On the four sides (of the pile) they made steps by which to ascend it. With
+clean white hair-cloth, almost like silk, they wrapped (the body) round and
+round.(2) They made a large carriage-frame, in form like our funeral car, but
+without the dragons and fishes.(3)
+</p>
+
+<p>
+At the time of the cremation, the king and the people, in multitudes from all
+quarters, collected together, and presented offerings of flowers and incense.
+While they were following the car to the burial-ground,(4) the king himself
+presented flowers and incense. When this was finished, the car was lifted on
+the pile, all over which oil of sweet basil was poured, and then a light was
+applied. While the fire was blazing, every one, with a reverent heart, pulled
+off his upper garment, and threw it, with his feather-fan and umbrella, from a
+distance into the midst of the flames, to assist the burning. When the
+cremation was over, they collected and preserved the bones, and proceeded to
+erect a tope. Fâ-Hien had not arrived in time (to see the distinguished
+Shaman) alive, and only saw his burial.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+At that time the king,(5) who was a sincere believer in the Law of Buddha and
+wished to build a new vihâra for the monks, first convoked a great assembly.
+After giving the monks a meal of rice, and presenting his offerings (on the
+occasion), he selected a pair of first-rate oxen, the horns of which were
+grandly decorated with gold, silver, and the precious substances. A golden
+plough had been provided, and the king himself turned up a furrow on the four
+sides of the ground within which the building was supposed to be. He then
+endowed the community of the monks with the population, fields, and houses,
+writing the grant on plates of metal, (to the effect) that from that time
+onwards, from generation to generation, no one should venture to annul or alter
+it.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+In this country Fâ-Hien heard an Indian devotee, who was reciting a Sutra from
+the pulpit, say:&mdash;&ldquo;Buddha&rsquo;s alms-bowl was at first in Vaisali,
+and now it is in Gandhara.(6) After so many hundred years&rdquo; (he gave, when
+Fâ-Hien heard him, the exact number of years, but he has forgotten it),
+&ldquo;it will go to Western Tukhara;(7) after so many hundred years, to
+Khoten; after so many hundred years, to Kharachar;(8) after so many hundred
+years, to the land of Han; after so many hundred years, it will come to
+Sinhala; and after so many hundred years, it will return to Central India.
+After that, it will ascend to the Tushita heaven; and when the Bodhisattva
+Maitreya sees it, he will say with a sigh, &lsquo;The alms-bowl of Sâkyamuni
+Buddha is come;&rsquo; and with all the devas he will present to it flowers and
+incense for seven days. When these have expired, it will return to Jambudvipa,
+where it will be received by the king of the sea nagas, and taken into his naga
+palace. When Maitreya shall be about to attain to perfect Wisdom (and become
+Buddha), it will again separate into four bowls,(9) which will return to the
+top of mount Anna,(9) whence they came. After Maitreya has become Buddha, the
+four deva kings will again think of the Buddha (with their bowls as they did in
+the case of the previous Buddha). The thousand Buddhas of this Bhadra-kalpa,
+indeed, will all use the same alms-bowl; and when the bowl has disappeared, the
+Law of Buddha will go on gradually to be extinguished. After that extinction
+has taken place, the life of man will be shortened, till it is only a period of
+five years. During this period of a five years&rsquo; life, rice, butter, and
+oil will all vanish away, and men will become exceedingly wicked. The grass and
+trees which they lay hold of will change into swords and clubs, with which they
+will hurt, cut, and kill one another. Those among them on whom there is
+blessing will withdraw from society among the hills; and when the wicked have
+exterminated one another, they will again come forth, and say among themselves,
+&lsquo;The men of former times enjoyed a very great longevity; but through
+becoming exceedingly wicked, and doing all lawless things, the length of our
+life has been shortened and reduced even to five years. Let us now unite
+together in the practice of what is good, cherishing a gentle and sympathising
+heart, and carefully cultivating good faith and righteousness. When each one in
+this way practises that faith and righteousness, life will go on to double its
+length till it reaches 80,000 years. When Maitreya appears in the world, and
+begins to turn the wheel of his Law, he will in the first place save those
+among the disciples of the Law left by the Sakya who have quitted their
+families, and those who have accepted the three Refuges, undertaken the five
+Prohibitions and the eight Abstinences, and given offerings to the three
+Precious Ones; secondly and thirdly, he will save those between whom and
+conversion there is a connexion transmitted from the past.&rsquo;&rdquo;(10)
+</p>
+
+<p>
+(Such was the discourse), and Fâ-Hien wished to write it down as a portion of
+doctrine; but the man said, &ldquo;This is taken from no Sutra, it is only the
+utterance of my own mind.&rdquo;
+</p>
+
+<p class="center">
+NOTES
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(1) Possibly, &ldquo;and asked the bhikshu,&rdquo; &amp;c. I prefer the other
+way of construing, however.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(2) It seems strange that this should have been understood as a wrapping of the
+immense pyre with the cloth. There is nothing in the text to necessitate such a
+version, but the contrary. Compare &ldquo;Buddhist Suttas,&rdquo; pp. 92, 93.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(3) See the description of a funeral car and its decorations in the Sacred
+Books of the East, vol. xxviii, the Li Ki, Book XIX. Fâ-Hien&rsquo;s {.} {.},
+&ldquo;in this (country),&rdquo; which I have expressed by &ldquo;our,&rdquo;
+shows that whatever notes of this cremation he had taken at the time, the
+account in the text was composed after his return to China, and when he had the
+usages there in his mind and perhaps before his eyes. This disposes of all
+difficulty occasioned by the &ldquo;dragons&rdquo; and &ldquo;fishes.&rdquo;
+The {.} at the end is merely the concluding particle.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(4) The pyre served the purpose of a burial-ground or grave, and hence our
+author writes of it as such.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(5) This king must have been Maha-nana (A.D. 410-432). In the time of his
+predecessor, Upatissa (A.D. 368-410), the pitakas were first translated into
+Singhalese. Under Maha-nana, Buddhaghosha wrote his commentaries. Both were
+great builders of vihâras. See the Mahavansa, pp. 247, foll.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(6) See chapter xii. Fâ-Hien had seen it at Purushapura, which Eitel says was
+&ldquo;the ancient capital of Gandhara.&rdquo;
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(7) Western Tukhara ({.} {.}) is the same probably as the Tukhara ({.}) of
+chapter xii, a king of which is there described as trying to carry off the bowl
+from Purushapura.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(8) North of the Bosteng lake at the foot of the Thien-shan range (E. H., p.
+56).
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(9) See chap. xii, note 9. Instead of &ldquo;Anna&rdquo; the Chinese recensions
+have Vina; but Vina or Vinataka, and Ana for Sudarsana are names of one or
+other of the concentric circles of rocks surrounding mount Meru, the fabled
+home of the deva guardians of the bowl.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(10) That is, those whose Karma in the past should be rewarded by such
+conversion in the present.
+</p>
+
+</div><!--end chapter-->
+
+<div class="chapter">
+
+<h2><a name="chap40"></a>CHAPTER XL.<br />
+AFTER TWO YEARS TAKES SHIP FOR CHINA. DISASTROUS PASSAGE TO JAVA; AND THENCE TO
+CHINA; ARRIVES AT SHAN-TUNG; AND GOES TO NANKING. CONCLUSION OR L&rsquo;ENVOI
+BY ANOTHER WRITER.</h2>
+
+<p>
+Fâ-Hien abode in this country two years; and, in addition (to his acquisitions
+in Patna), succeeded in getting a copy of the Vinaya-pitaka of the Mahisasakah
+(school);(1) the Dirghagama and Samyuktagama(2) (Sûtras); and also the
+Samyukta-sanchaya-pitaka;(3)&mdash;all being works unknown in the land of Han.
+Having obtained these Sanskrit works, he took passage in a large merchantman,
+on board of which there were more than 200 men, and to which was attached by a
+rope a smaller vessel, as a provision against damage or injury to the large one
+from the perils of the navigation. With a favourable wind, they proceeded
+eastwards for three days, and then they encountered a great wind. The vessel
+sprang a leak and the water came in. The merchants wished to go to the small
+vessel; but the men on board it, fearing that too many would come, cut the
+connecting rope. The merchants were greatly alarmed, feeling their risk of
+instant death. Afraid that the vessel would fill, they took their bulky goods
+and threw them into the water. Fâ-Hien also took his pitcher(4) and
+washing-basin, with some other articles, and cast them into the sea; but
+fearing that the merchants would cast overboard his books and images, he could
+only think with all his heart of Kwan-she-yin,(5) and commit his life to (the
+protection of) the church of the land of Han,(6) (saying in effect), &ldquo;I
+have travelled far in search of our Law. Let me, by your dread and supernatural
+(power), return from my wanderings, and reach my resting-place!&rdquo;
+</p>
+
+<p>
+In this way the tempest(7) continued day and night, till on the thirteenth day
+the ship was carried to the side of an island, where, on the ebbing of the
+tide, the place of the leak was discovered, and it was stopped, on which the
+voyage was resumed. On the sea (hereabouts) there are many pirates, to meet
+with whom is speedy death. The great ocean spreads out, a boundless expanse.
+There is no knowing east or west; only by observing the sun, moon, and stars
+was it possible to go forward. If the weather were dark and rainy, (the ship)
+went as she was carried by the wind, without any definite course. In the
+darkness of the night, only the great waves were to be seen, breaking on one
+another, and emitting a brightness like that of fire, with huge turtles and
+other monsters of the deep (all about). The merchants were full of terror, not
+knowing where they were going. The sea was deep and bottomless, and there was
+no place where they could drop anchor and stop. But when the sky became clear,
+they could tell east and west, and (the ship) again went forward in the right
+direction. If she had come on any hidden rock, there would have been no way of
+escape.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+After proceeding in this way for rather more than ninety days, they arrived at
+a country called Java-dvipa, where various forms of error and Brahmanism are
+flourishing, while Buddhism in it is not worth speaking of. After staying there
+for five months, (Fâ-Hien) again embarked in another large merchantman, which
+also had on board more than 200 men. They carried provisions for fifty days,
+and commenced the voyage on the sixteenth day of the fourth month.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+Fâ-Hien kept his retreat on board the ship. They took a course to the
+north-east, intending to fetch Kwang-chow. After more than a month, when the
+night-drum had sounded the second watch, they encountered a black wind and
+tempestuous rain, which threw the merchants and passengers into consternation.
+Fâ-Hien again with all his heart directed his thoughts to Kwan-she-yin and the
+monkish communities of the land of Han; and, through their dread and mysterious
+protection, was preserved to day-break. After day-break, the Brahmans
+deliberated together and said, &ldquo;It is having this Sramana on board which
+has occasioned our misfortune and brought us this great and bitter suffering.
+Let us land the bhikshu and place him on some island-shore. We must not for the
+sake of one man allow ourselves to be exposed to such imminent peril.&rdquo; A
+patron of Fâ-Hien, however, said to them, &ldquo;If you land the bhikshu, you
+must at the same time land me; and if you do not, then you must kill me. If you
+land this Sramana, when I get to the land of Han, I will go to the king, and
+inform against you. The king also reveres and believes the Law of Buddha, and
+honours the bhikshus.&rdquo; The merchants hereupon were perplexed, and did not
+dare immediately to land (Fâ-Hien).
+</p>
+
+<p>
+At this time the sky continued very dark and gloomy, and the sailing-masters
+looked at one another and made mistakes. More than seventy days passed (from
+their leaving Java), and the provisions and water were nearly exhausted. They
+used the salt-water of the sea for cooking, and carefully divided the (fresh)
+water, each man getting two pints. Soon the whole was nearly gone, and the
+merchants took counsel and said, &ldquo;At the ordinary rate of sailing we
+ought to have reached Kwang-chow, and now the time is passed by many
+days;&mdash;must we not have held a wrong course?&rdquo; Immediately they
+directed the ship to the north-west, looking out for land; and after sailing
+day and night for twelve days, they reached the shore on the south of mount
+Lao,(8) on the borders of the prefecture of Ch&rsquo;ang-kwang,(8) and
+immediately got good water and vegetables. They had passed through many perils
+and hardships, and had been in a state of anxious apprehension for many days
+together; and now suddenly arriving at this shore, and seeing those
+(well-known) vegetables, the lei and kwoh,(9) they knew indeed that it was the
+land of Han. Not seeing, however, any inhabitants nor any traces of them, they
+did not know whereabouts they were. Some said that they had not yet got to
+Kwang-chow, and others that they had passed it. Unable to come to a definite
+conclusion, (some of them) got into a small boat and entered a creek, to look
+for some one of whom they might ask what the place was. They found two hunters,
+whom they brought back with them, and then called on Fâ-Hien to act as
+interpreter and question them. Fâ-Hien first spoke assuringly to them, and
+then slowly and distinctly asked them, &ldquo;Who are you?&rdquo; They replied,
+&ldquo;We are disciples of Buddha?&rdquo; He then asked, &ldquo;What are you
+looking for among these hills?&rdquo; They began to lie,(10) and said,
+&ldquo;To-morrow is the fifteenth day of the seventh month. We wanted to get
+some peaches to present(11) to Buddha.&rdquo; He asked further, &ldquo;What
+country is this?&rdquo; They replied, &ldquo;This is the border of the
+prefecture of Ch&rsquo;ang-kwang, a part of Ts&rsquo;ing-chow under the
+(ruling) House of Tsin.&rdquo; When they heard this, the merchants were glad,
+immediately asked for (a portion of) their money and goods, and sent men to
+Ch&rsquo;ang-kwang city.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+The prefect Le E was a reverent believer in the Law of Buddha. When he heard
+that a Sramana had arrived in a ship across the sea, bringing with him books
+and images, he immediately came to the seashore with an escort to meet (the
+traveller), and receive the books and images, and took them back with him to
+the seat of his government. On this the merchants went back in the direction of
+Yang-chow;(12) (but) when (Fâ-Hien) arrived at Ts&rsquo;ing-chow, (the prefect
+there)(13) begged him (to remain with him) for a winter and a summer. After the
+summer retreat was ended, Fâ-Hien, having been separated for a long time from
+his (fellow-)masters, wished to hurry to Ch&rsquo;ang-gan; but as the business
+which he had in hand was important, he went south to the Capital;(14) and at an
+interview with the masters (there) exhibited the Sûtras and the collection of
+the Vinaya (which he had procured).
+</p>
+
+<p>
+After Fâ-Hien set out from Ch&rsquo;ang-gan, it took him six years to reach
+Central India;(15) stoppages there extended over (other) six years; and on his
+return it took him three years to reach Ts&rsquo;ing-chow. The countries
+through which he passed were a few under thirty. From the sandy desert
+westwards on to India, the beauty of the dignified demeanour of the monkhood
+and of the transforming influence of the Law was beyond the power of language
+fully to describe; and reflecting how our masters had not heard any complete
+account of them, he therefore (went on) without regarding his own poor life, or
+(the dangers to be encountered) on the sea upon his return, thus incurring
+hardships and difficulties in a double form. He was fortunate enough, through
+the dread power of the three Honoured Ones,(15) to receive help and protection
+in his perils; and therefore he wrote out an account of his experiences, that
+worthy readers might share with him in what he had heard and said.(15)
+</p>
+
+<p>
+It was in the year Keah-yin,(16) the twelfth year of the period E-he of the
+(Eastern) Tsin dynasty, the year-star being in Virgo-Libra, in the summer, at
+the close of the period of retreat, that I met the devotee Fâ-Hien. On his
+arrival I lodged him with myself in the winter study,(17) and there, in our
+meetings for conversation, I asked him again and again about his travels. The
+man was modest and complaisant, and answered readily according to the truth. I
+thereupon advised him to enter into details where he had at first only given a
+summary, and he proceeded to relate all things in order from the beginning to
+the end. He said himself, &ldquo;When I look back on what I have gone through,
+my heart is involuntarily moved, and the perspiration flows forth. That I
+encountered danger and trod the most perilous places, without thinking of or
+sparing myself, was because I had a definite aim, and thought of nothing but to
+do my best in my simplicity and straightforwardness. Thus it was that I exposed
+my life where death seemed inevitable, if I might accomplish but a
+ten-thousandth part of what I hoped.&rdquo; These words affected me in turn,
+and I thought:&mdash;&ldquo;This man is one of those who have seldom been seen
+from ancient times to the present. Since the Great Doctrine flowed on to the
+East there has been no one to be compared with Hien in his forgetfulness of
+self and search for the Law. Henceforth I know that the influence of sincerity
+finds no obstacle, however great, which it does not overcome, and that force of
+will does not fail to accomplish whatever service it undertakes. Does not the
+accomplishing of such service arise from forgetting (and disregarding) what is
+(generally) considered as important, and attaching importance to what is
+(generally) forgotten?&rdquo;
+</p>
+
+<p class="center">
+NOTES
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(1) No. 1122 in Nanjio&rsquo;s Catalogue, translated into Chinese by Buddhajiva
+and a Chinese Sramana about A.D. 425. Mahisasakah means &ldquo;the school of
+the transformed earth,&rdquo; or &ldquo;the sphere within which the Law of
+Buddha is influential.&rdquo; The school is one of the subdivisions of the
+Sarvastivadah.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(2) Nanjio&rsquo;s 545 and 504. The Agamas are Sûtras of the hinayana, divided,
+according to Eitel, pp. 4, 5, into four classes, the first or Dirghagamas (long
+Agamas) being treatises on right conduct, while the third class contains the
+Samyuktagamas (mixed Agamas).
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(3) Meaning &ldquo;Miscellaneous Collections;&rdquo; a sort of fourth Pitaka.
+See Nanjio&rsquo;s fourth division of the Canon, containing Indian and Chinese
+miscellaneous works. But Dr. Davids says that no work of this name is known
+either in Sanskrit or Pâli literature.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(4) We have in the text a phonetisation of the Sanskrit Kundika, which is
+explained in Eitel by the two characters that follow, as=&ldquo;washing
+basin,&rdquo; but two things evidently are intended.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(5) See chap. xvi, note 23.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(6) At his novitiate Fâ-Hien had sought the refuge of the &ldquo;three
+Precious Ones&rdquo; (the three Refuges {.} {.} of last chapter), of which the
+congregation or body of the monks was one; and here his thoughts turn naturally
+to the branch of it in China. His words in his heart were not exactly words of
+prayer, but very nearly so.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(7) In the text {.} {.}, ta-fung, &ldquo;the great wind,&rdquo;=the typhoon.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(8) They had got to the south of the Shan-tung promontory, and the foot of
+mount Lao, which still rises under the same name on the extreme south of the
+peninsula, east from Keao Chow, and having the district of Tsieh-mih on the
+east of it. All the country there is included in the present Phing-too Chow of
+the department Lae-chow. The name Phing-too dates from the Han dynasty, but
+under the dynasty of the After Ch&rsquo;e {.} {.}, (A.D. 479-501), it was
+changed into Ch&rsquo;ang-kwang. Fâ-Hien may have lived, and composed the
+narrative of his travels, after the change of name was adopted. See the
+Topographical Tables of the different Dynasties ({.} {.} {.} {.} {.}),
+published in 1815.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(9) What these vegetables exactly were it is difficult to say; and there are
+different readings of the characters for them. Williams&rsquo; Dictionary,
+under kwoh, brings the two names together in a phrase, but the rendering of it
+is simply &ldquo;a soup of simples.&rdquo; For two or three columns here,
+however, the text appears to me confused and imperfect.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(10) I suppose these men were really hunters; and, when brought before
+Fâ-Hien, because he was a Sramana, they thought they would please him by
+saying they were disciples of Buddha. But what had disciples of Buddha to do
+with hunting and taking life? They were caught in their own trap, and said they
+were looking for peaches.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(11) The Chinese character here has occurred twice before, but in a different
+meaning and connexion. Rémusat, Beal, and Giles take it as equivalent to
+&ldquo;to sacrifice.&rdquo; But his followers do not &ldquo;sacrifice&rdquo; to
+Buddha. That is a priestly term, and should not be employed of anything done at
+Buddhistic services.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(12) Probably the present department of Yang-chow in Keang-soo; but as I have
+said in a previous note, the narrative does not go on so clearly as it
+generally does.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(13) Was, or could, this prefect be Le E?
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(14) Probably not Ch&rsquo;ang-gan, but Nan-king, which was the capital of the
+Eastern Tsin dynasty under another name.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(15) The whole of this paragraph is probably Fâ-Hien&rsquo;s own conclusion of
+his narrative. The second half of the second sentence, both in sentiment and
+style in the Chinese text, seems to necessitate our ascribing it to him,
+writing on the impulse of his own thoughts, in the same indirect form which he
+adopted for his whole narrative. There are, however, two peculiar phraseologies
+in it which might suggest the work of another hand. For the name India, where
+the first (15) is placed, a character is employed which is similarly applied
+nowhere else; and again, &ldquo;the three Honoured Ones,&rdquo; at which the
+second (15) is placed, must be the same as &ldquo;the three Precious
+Ones,&rdquo; which we have met with so often; unless we suppose that {.} {.} is
+printed in all the revisions for {.} {.}, &ldquo;the World-honoured one,&rdquo;
+which has often occurred. On the whole, while I accept this paragraph as
+Fâ-Hien&rsquo;s own, I do it with some hesitation. That the following and
+concluding paragraph is from another hand, there can be no doubt. And it is as
+different as possible in style from the simple and straightforward narrative of
+Fâ-Hien.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(16) There is an error of date here, for which it is difficult to account. The
+year Keah-yin was A.D. 414; but that was the tenth year of the period E-he, and
+not the twelfth, the cyclical designation of which was Ping-shin. According to
+the preceding paragraph, Fâ-Hien&rsquo;s travels had occupied him fifteen
+years, so that counting from A.D. 399, the year Ke-hae, as that in which he set
+out, the year of his getting to Ts&rsquo;ing-chow would have been Kwei-chow,
+the ninth year of the period E-he; and we might join on &ldquo;This year
+Keah-yin&rdquo; to that paragraph, as the date at which the narrative was
+written out for the bamboo-tablets and the silk, and then begins the Envoy,
+&ldquo;In the twelfth year of E-he.&rdquo; This would remove the error as it
+stands at present, but unfortunately there is a particle at the end of the
+second date ({.}), which seems to tie the twelfth year of E-he to Keah-yin, as
+another designation of it. The &ldquo;year-star&rdquo; is the planet Jupiter,
+the revolution of which, in twelve years, constitutes &ldquo;a great
+year.&rdquo; Whether it would be possible to fix exactly by mathematical
+calculation in what year Jupiter was in the Chinese zodiacal sign embracing
+part of both Virgo and Scorpio, and thereby help to solve the difficulty of the
+passage, I do not know, and in the meantime must leave that difficulty as I
+have found it.
+</p>
+
+<p class="footnote">
+(17) We do not know who the writer of the Envoy was. &ldquo;The winter study or
+library&rdquo; would be the name of the apartment in his monastery or house,
+where he sat and talked with Fâ-Hien.
+</p>
+
+</div><!--end chapter-->
+
+<div style='display:block;margin-top:4em'>*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK A RECORD OF BUDDHISTIC KINGDOMS ***</div>
+<div style='display:block;margin:1em 0;'>This file should be named 2124-h.htm or 2124-h.zip</div>
+<div style='display:block;margin:1em 0;'>This and all associated files of various formats will be found in https://www.gutenberg.org/2/1/2/2124/</div>
+<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
+Updated editions will replace the previous one&#8212;the old editions will
+be renamed.
+</div>
+
+<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
+Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright
+law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works,
+so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United
+States without permission and without paying copyright
+royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part
+of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project
+Gutenberg&#8482; electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG&#8482;
+concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark,
+and may not be used if you charge for an eBook, except by following
+the terms of the trademark license, including paying royalties for use
+of the Project Gutenberg trademark. If you do not charge anything for
+copies of this eBook, complying with the trademark license is very
+easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose such as creation
+of derivative works, reports, performances and research. Project
+Gutenberg eBooks may be modified and printed and given away--you may
+do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks not protected
+by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the trademark
+license, especially commercial redistribution.
+</div>
+
+<div style='margin:0.83em 0; font-size:1.1em; text-align:center'>START: FULL LICENSE<br />
+<span style='font-size:smaller'>THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE<br />
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK</span>
+</div>
+
+<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
+To protect the Project Gutenberg&#8482; mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase &#8220;Project
+Gutenberg&#8221;), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full
+Project Gutenberg&#8482; License available with this file or online at
+www.gutenberg.org/license.
+</div>
+
+<div style='display:block; font-size:1.1em; margin:1em 0; font-weight:bold'>
+Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg&#8482; electronic works
+</div>
+
+<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
+1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg&#8482;
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or
+destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg&#8482; electronic works in your
+possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a
+Project Gutenberg&#8482; electronic work and you do not agree to be bound
+by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person
+or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+</div>
+
+<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
+1.B. &#8220;Project Gutenberg&#8221; is a registered trademark. It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg&#8482; electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See
+paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg&#8482; electronic works if you follow the terms of this
+agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg&#8482;
+electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below.
+</div>
+
+<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
+1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation (&#8220;the
+Foundation&#8221; or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection
+of Project Gutenberg&#8482; electronic works. Nearly all the individual
+works in the collection are in the public domain in the United
+States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the
+United States and you are located in the United States, we do not
+claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing,
+displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as
+all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope
+that you will support the Project Gutenberg&#8482; mission of promoting
+free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg&#8482;
+works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the
+Project Gutenberg&#8482; name associated with the work. You can easily
+comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the
+same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg&#8482; License when
+you share it without charge with others.
+</div>
+
+<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
+1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are
+in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States,
+check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this
+agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing,
+distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any
+other Project Gutenberg&#8482; work. The Foundation makes no
+representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any
+country other than the United States.
+</div>
+
+<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
+1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+</div>
+
+<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
+1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other
+immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg&#8482; License must appear
+prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg&#8482; work (any work
+on which the phrase &#8220;Project Gutenberg&#8221; appears, or with which the
+phrase &#8220;Project Gutenberg&#8221; is associated) is accessed, displayed,
+performed, viewed, copied or distributed:
+</div>
+
+<blockquote>
+ <div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
+ This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and most
+ other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions
+ whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms
+ of the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online
+ at <a href="https://www.gutenberg.org">www.gutenberg.org</a>. If you
+ are not located in the United States, you will have to check the laws
+ of the country where you are located before using this eBook.
+ </div>
+</blockquote>
+
+<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
+1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg&#8482; electronic work is
+derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not
+contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the
+copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in
+the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are
+redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase &#8220;Project
+Gutenberg&#8221; associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply
+either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or
+obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg&#8482;
+trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+</div>
+
+<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
+1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg&#8482; electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any
+additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms
+will be linked to the Project Gutenberg&#8482; License for all works
+posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the
+beginning of this work.
+</div>
+
+<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
+1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg&#8482;
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg&#8482;.
+</div>
+
+<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
+1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg&#8482; License.
+</div>
+
+<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
+1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including
+any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access
+to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg&#8482; work in a format
+other than &#8220;Plain Vanilla ASCII&#8221; or other format used in the official
+version posted on the official Project Gutenberg&#8482; website
+(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense
+to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means
+of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original &#8220;Plain
+Vanilla ASCII&#8221; or other form. Any alternate format must include the
+full Project Gutenberg&#8482; License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+</div>
+
+<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
+1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg&#8482; works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+</div>
+
+<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
+1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg&#8482; electronic works
+provided that:
+</div>
+
+<div style='margin-left:0.7em;'>
+ <div style='text-indent:-0.7em'>
+ &bull; You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+ the use of Project Gutenberg&#8482; works calculated using the method
+ you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed
+ to the owner of the Project Gutenberg&#8482; trademark, but he has
+ agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project
+ Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid
+ within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are
+ legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty
+ payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project
+ Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in
+ Section 4, &#8220;Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg
+ Literary Archive Foundation.&#8221;
+ </div>
+
+ <div style='text-indent:-0.7em'>
+ &bull; You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+ you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+ does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg&#8482;
+ License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all
+ copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue
+ all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg&#8482;
+ works.
+ </div>
+
+ <div style='text-indent:-0.7em'>
+ &bull; You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of
+ any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+ electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of
+ receipt of the work.
+ </div>
+
+ <div style='text-indent:-0.7em'>
+ &bull; You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+ distribution of Project Gutenberg&#8482; works.
+ </div>
+</div>
+
+<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
+1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project
+Gutenberg&#8482; electronic work or group of works on different terms than
+are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing
+from the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the manager of
+the Project Gutenberg&#8482; trademark. Contact the Foundation as set
+forth in Section 3 below.
+</div>
+
+<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
+1.F.
+</div>
+
+<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
+1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project
+Gutenberg&#8482; collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg&#8482;
+electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may
+contain &#8220;Defects,&#8221; such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate
+or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other
+intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or
+other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or
+cannot be read by your equipment.
+</div>
+
+<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
+1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the &#8220;Right
+of Replacement or Refund&#8221; described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg&#8482; trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg&#8482; electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+</div>
+
+<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
+1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium
+with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you
+with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in
+lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person
+or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second
+opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If
+the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing
+without further opportunities to fix the problem.
+</div>
+
+<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
+1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you &#8216;AS-IS&#8217;, WITH NO
+OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
+LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+</div>
+
+<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
+1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of
+damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement
+violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the
+agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or
+limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or
+unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the
+remaining provisions.
+</div>
+
+<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
+1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg&#8482; electronic works in
+accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the
+production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg&#8482;
+electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses,
+including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of
+the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this
+or any Project Gutenberg&#8482; work, (b) alteration, modification, or
+additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg&#8482; work, and (c) any
+Defect you cause.
+</div>
+
+<div style='display:block; font-size:1.1em; margin:1em 0; font-weight:bold'>
+Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg&#8482;
+</div>
+
+<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
+Project Gutenberg&#8482; is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of
+computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It
+exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations
+from people in all walks of life.
+</div>
+
+<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg&#8482;&#8217;s
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg&#8482; collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg&#8482; and future
+generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see
+Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at www.gutenberg.org.
+</div>
+
+<div style='display:block; font-size:1.1em; margin:1em 0; font-weight:bold'>
+Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+</div>
+
+<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non-profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service. The Foundation&#8217;s EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by
+U.S. federal laws and your state&#8217;s laws.
+</div>
+
+<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
+The Foundation&#8217;s business office is located at 809 North 1500 West,
+Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email contact links and up
+to date contact information can be found at the Foundation&#8217;s website
+and official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact
+</div>
+
+<div style='display:block; font-size:1.1em; margin:1em 0; font-weight:bold'>
+Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+</div>
+
+<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
+Project Gutenberg&#8482; depends upon and cannot survive without widespread
+public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine-readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+</div>
+
+<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND
+DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular state
+visit <a href="https://www.gutenberg.org/donate/">www.gutenberg.org/donate</a>.
+</div>
+
+<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+</div>
+
+<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+</div>
+
+<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
+Please check the Project Gutenberg web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To
+donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate
+</div>
+
+<div style='display:block; font-size:1.1em; margin:1em 0; font-weight:bold'>
+Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg&#8482; electronic works
+</div>
+
+<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
+Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project
+Gutenberg&#8482; concept of a library of electronic works that could be
+freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and
+distributed Project Gutenberg&#8482; eBooks with only a loose network of
+volunteer support.
+</div>
+
+<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
+Project Gutenberg&#8482; eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in
+the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not
+necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper
+edition.
+</div>
+
+<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
+Most people start at our website which has the main PG search
+facility: <a href="https://www.gutenberg.org">www.gutenberg.org</a>.
+</div>
+
+<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>
+This website includes information about Project Gutenberg&#8482;,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
+</div>
+
+</body>
+
+</html>
diff --git a/2124-h/images/cover.jpg b/2124-h/images/cover.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e6705b4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/2124-h/images/cover.jpg
Binary files differ
diff --git a/2124-h/images/fig01.jpg b/2124-h/images/fig01.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b9dd126
--- /dev/null
+++ b/2124-h/images/fig01.jpg
Binary files differ